5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual

Transcript

5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual Abstract This manual describes the 5190/5194 modular tape subsystem and its components. It includes technical information and procedures for installing, operating, and configuring the subsystem on Compaq NonStop™ Himalaya servers. This manual is written for anyone who is responsible for installing, configuring, or managing the 5190/5194 modular tape subsystem. Product Version N.A. Supported Releases This manual supports D40.00 and all subsequent D4x releases and G06.09 and all subsequent G-series releases until otherwise indicated by its replacement publication. Part Number Published 426878-002 May 2002 Document History Part Number Product Version Published 111154 N.A. May 1995 129451 N.A. December 1996 424962-001 N.A. May 2000 426878-001 N.A. July 2000 426878-002 N.A. May 2002 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual Glossary Index What’s New in This Manual ix Manual Information ix New and Changed Information Figures Tables ix About This Manual xi Who Should Use This Manual xi What Is in This Manual xi Where to Get More Information xiii Your Comments Invited xiv Notation Conventions xiv 1. Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem Overview 1-1 Supported Releases 1-2 The 5190 and 5194 Cartridge Tape Drives 1-2 Cartridges 1-3 Tape Compatibility 1-4 Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes 1-5 Data Compression 1-5 Performance 1-6 The Automatic Cartridge Loader 1-7 The Modular Storage System 1-8 5190/5194 NonStop Himalaya K-Series Interface Components Multifunction Controller (MFC) 1-10 SCSI Cable (MFC) 1-11 3216 Tape Controller 1-11 Back-End Board (3216 Controller) 1-12 Fiber-Optic Cable 1-12 SCSI Extender for Fiber-Optic Cable 1-13 5190/5194 NonStop Himalaya S-Series Interface Components Processor Multifunction (PMF) CRU 1-14 I/O Multifunction (IOMF) CRU 1-15 Compaq Computer Corporation —426878-002 i 1-10 1-13 Contents 2. Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem SCSI Cable (PMF CRU, IOMF CRU, or 6760 Adapter) SCSI Extender for Fiber-Optic Cable 1-16 Back-End Board (6760 Adapter) 1-16 Fiber-Optic Cable (6760 Adapter) 1-16 1-15 2. Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem for NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers 2-1 Completing the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram 2-1 Completing the 3216 Controller BIC Diagram 2-4 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP 2-7 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem for NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers 2-18 The Group, Module, and Slot Hierarchy 2-19 Identifying CRUs 2-19 Completing the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU Configuration Form 2-20 Completing the 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form 2-23 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using SCF 2-25 2-13 3. Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Service Classes of Components 3-1 Installation Overview (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-2 Installation Overview (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 3-3 Installation Planning 3-4 Limitations (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 3-4 Device IDs 3-4 Service Clearance and Dimensions 3-7 Environmental Requirements 3-9 Fiber-Optic Cable Installation 3-9 AC Power Requirements 3-9 Power Cords 3-10 Stack Height 3-10 Migrating a Tape Drive to a NonStop Himalaya S-Series Server 3-12 Tape Drive Configurations 3-12 Unpacking the Modular Storage System 3-16 Installing a Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-19 Installing the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-19 Installing the 3216 Tape Controller (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-20 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 ii Contents 4. Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Installing a Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 3-22 Connecting the Modular Tape Subsystem 3-22 Opening and Removing the Rear Bezel Door 3-23 Installing the BEB (Fiber-Optic Cables Only) 3-25 Connecting and Routing the AC Power Cords 3-26 Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the BEB 3-28 Connecting a SCSI Cable 3-30 Connecting Cables to NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers 3-34 Connecting Cables to NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers 3-36 Loading the Operating System Image (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-39 Bringing the Tape Drives Online After Installation 3-39 Checking and Setting the Device ID 3-41 Installing the Cleaning Cartridge in the ACL 3-44 Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-45 Starting a Tape Device 3-45 Testing a Tape Device 3-45 Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 3-46 Starting a Tape Device 3-46 Testing a Tape Device 3-46 Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-48 Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 3-52 4. Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Common Operations 4-1 Handling and Transporting Cartridge Tapes 4-2 Storing Cartridge Tapes 4-3 Setting the File-Protect Thumbwheel 4-3 Using Damaged Cartridges 4-4 Using a Cleaning Cartridge 4-4 Operating a Tape Drive With an ACL 4-5 Controls on the ACL Front Panel 4-6 Bringing the ACL and Tape Drive Online or Offline 4-10 Using the Cartridge Magazine 4-11 Removing the Cartridge Magazine 4-12 Mounting Cartridges in the Magazine 4-14 Loading the Cartridge Magazine 4-15 Removing Cartridges From the Magazine Using the Cartridge Locking Bar Setting the File-Protect Switch 4-17 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 iii 4-16 Contents 4. Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Selecting the Operating Mode 4-18 Rewinding and Unloading Cartridges 4-18 Rewinding a Tape to BOT 4-19 Unlocking the ACL Door When Power Is Removed 4-20 Operating a Tape Drive Without an ACL 4-22 Controls on the Drive Front Panel 4-22 Loading Cartridges 4-24 Unloading Cartridges 4-25 Rewinding a Tape 4-26 Cleaning a Tape Drive 4-27 Cleaning a Tape Drive With an ACL 4-27 Cleaning a Tape Drive Without an ACL 4-28 Understanding Operator Messages 4-28 READY States 4-30 NOT READY States 4-30 Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes 4-31 Using PUP With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 4-32 Checking the Status of a Cartridge Tape Drive 4-32 Bringing Up a Cartridge Tape Drive 4-33 Bringing Down a Cartridge Tape Drive 4-34 Using SCF With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 4-35 Checking the Status of a Cartridge Tape Drive 4-35 Starting a Cartridge Tape Drive 4-37 Stopping a Cartridge Tape Drive 4-37 Using the TSM Package With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 4-38 Using BACKUP and RESTORE With the Modular Tape Subsystem 4-38 Backing Up Disk Files to Tape 4-38 Backups Requiring Multiple Cartridge Tapes 4-39 Restoring Tape Files to Disk 4-40 Viewing the Contents of a Tape 4-40 Using the BLOCKSIZE Option 4-40 Using the NOUNLOAD Option 4-41 TMF Support 4-41 Using Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes on NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers 4-42 Using the MEDIACOM Utility for Labeled-Tape Operations 4-42 How to Enable Labeled-Tape Processing 4-42 Where to Get More Information About Labeled-Tape Processing 4-43 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 iv 5. Using TMDS or the TSM Package Contents Preparing a Tape Drive for Online Dumps (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 4-43 Using Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes on NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers 4-43 How to Change Labeled-Tape Processing Configuration 4-44 Where to Get More Information About Labeled-Tape Processing 4-44 Controlling Data Compression (5190 Tape Drive) 4-44 The Compression LED 4-44 Using TMDS to Check the Compression Mode Status (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 4-45 Methods for Controlling Compression 4-45 Specifying a Compression Modifier in the PERIPHERALS Paragraph (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 4-46 Using COUP to Set Compression Mode (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 4-47 Using MEDIACOM to Set the Systemwide Compression Default Setting 4-49 Using a DEFINE to Override the Systemwide Compression Default Setting 4-50 Using SETMODE 162 to Override the Systemwide Compression Default Setting 4-52 Using SCF to Set Compression Mode (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 4-52 Programming and Configuration Considerations 4-53 Guardian Procedure Calls 4-53 Valid CONTROL Operations 4-54 Choosing Block Size 4-54 SETMODE Attributes 4-54 Running in Buffered Mode 4-55 Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Memory Dump (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 4-56 Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Memory Dump (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 4-57 Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Tape Load (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 4-57 Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Tape Load (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 4-58 5. Using TMDS or the TSM Package The TMDS TAPE Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Accessing the TAPE Subsystem 5-1 TAPE Subsystem Commands 5-2 TAPE Subsystem Help Subjects 5-3 TMDS Highlights (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 5-4 The FLASH Command 5-4 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 v 5-1 6. Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Contents The STATUS Command 5-5 The TSM Package (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 5-7 6. Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Procedures That Require a Service Provider 6-1 Replacing a BEB 6-2 Troubleshooting a BEB 6-2 Removing a BEB 6-3 Installing a BEB 6-4 Replacing a 5190 or 5194 Tape Drive CRU 6-5 Removing a Tape Drive CRU 6-5 Installing a Tape Drive CRU 6-8 Returning a Tape Drive CRU to Compaq 6-10 Replacing a Cleaning Cartridge in an ACL 6-10 Removing a Cleaning Cartridge From an ACL 6-11 Replacing a Controller (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 6-12 Replacing an MFC 6-12 Replacing a 3216 Tape Controller 6-12 Replacing a NonStop Himalaya S-Series Server Adapter 6-15 A. Part Numbers B. Blank Configuration Forms Safety and Compliance Glossary Index Figures Figure 1-1. Figure 1-2. Figure 1-3. Figure 1-4. Figure 1-5. Figure 1-6. Figure 1-7. Figure 1-8. Figure 2-1. Tape Drive Module With Two Tape Drive CRUs 1-3 A Cartridge Tape 1-4 Tape Drive Module With Two Tape Drive CRUs With ACLs 1-7 Modular Storage System Stack With Two Tape Drive Modules and Two ACLs 1-9 MFC Logic Board and RS-232/SCSI BIC 1-11 3216 Logic Board and Fiber-Optic BIC 1-12 NonStop Himalaya S-Series Processor Enclosures 1-14 NonStop Himalaya S-Series I/O Enclosure 1-15 Example of a Completed MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram 2-3 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 vi Figures Contents Figure 2-2. Figure 2-3. Figure 2-4. Figure 2-5. Figure 3-1. Figure 3-2. Figure 3-3. Figure 3-4. Figure 3-5. Figure 3-6. Figure 3-7. Figure 3-8. Figure 3-9. Figure 3-10. Figure 3-11. Figure 3-12. Figure 3-13. Figure 3-14. Figure 3-15. Figure 3-16. Figure 3-17. Figure 3-18. Figure 3-19. Figure 3-20. Figure 3-21. Figure 3-22. Figure 3-23. Figure 3-24. Figure 4-1. Figure 4-2. Figure 4-3. Figure 4-4. Figure 4-5. Figure 4-6. Figure 4-7. Figure 4-8. Example of a Completed 3216 Controller BIC Diagram 2-6 Example of a Completed PMF CRU Configuration Form 2-21 Example of a Completed IOMF CRU Configuration Form 2-22 Example of a Completed 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form 2-24 Drive Placement and Device IDs for Tape Drive CRUs Attached to a 3216 Controller 3-6 Service Clearances for the Modular Storage System 3-8 Maximum Stack Height for the Modular Storage System 3-11 MFC Drive Configuration 3-12 3216 Controller One-Drive Configuration 3-13 3216 Controller Two-Drive Configuration 3-13 PMF CRU or IOMF CRU Drive Configuration 3-14 6761 ServerNet/DA F-PIC With Two Drives Configured 3-15 6762 ServerNet/DA S-PIC With Two Drives Configured 3-15 Unpacking and Removing the Modular Storage System From the Shipping Pallet 3-17 Rear View of Two Tape Drive CRUs in a Module 3-23 Hinges on the Rear Bezel Door 3-24 Back-End Board (BEB) Enclosure 3-25 AC Power Cord Routing 3-27 Connecting Fiber-Optic Cable to the 5190/5194 BEB 3-28 Routing Fiber-Optic Cable Through the Extrusion Channel 3-30 Connecting SCSI Cable From the MFC to the Drive CRU 3-31 Routing SCSI Cable Into the Extrusion Channel 3-32 Connecting a SCSI Cable From the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU to the Drive CRU 3-33 Connecting SCSI Cable to the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC 3-34 Connecting Fiber-Optic Cable to the 3216 BIC 3-35 Connecting a SCSI Cable to the PMF CRU 3-37 Connecting a SCSI Cable to the IOMF CRU 3-38 AC Power Switch on Tape Drive CRU 3-39 Setting the File-Protect Thumbwheel on a Cartridge Tape 4-3 ACL Front Panel 4-6 ACL Cartridge Magazine 4-11 Removing the Cartridge Magazine 4-13 Cartridge Magazine Slot Numbers 4-14 Setting the File-Protect Switch on the Cartridge Magazine 4-17 Unlocking the ACL Door With the Door Release Lever 4-21 5190 and 5194 Tape Drive CRU Front Panel 4-22 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 vii Tables Contents Figure 4-9. Figure 6-1. Loading a Cartridge Tape Into a Tape Drive Without an ACL Removing a Tape Drive CRU 6-7 4-25 Tables Table 1. Table 1-1. Table 1-2. Table 1-3. Table 1-4. Table 1-5. Table 2-1. Table 3-1. Table 3-2. Table 3-3. Table 3-4. Table 3-5. Table 3-6. Table 3-7. Table 3-8. Table 4-1. Table 4-2. Table 4-3. Table 4-4. Table 4-5. Table 4-6. Table 4-7. Table 4-8. Table 4-9. Table 4-10. Table 4-11. Table 6-1. Table A-1. Summary of Contents xi Releases Supporting 5190 and 5194 Tape Drives 1-2 5190 and 5194 Cartridge Tape Compatibility 1-5 Cartridge Capacities 1-6 Tape Controller Comparison for NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers 1-10 Interface Component Comparison for NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers 1-13 Subchannel Addresses for I/O Controllers 2-14 NonStop Himalaya K-Series Tape Subsystem Installation Tasks 3-2 NonStop Himalaya S-Series Tape Subsystem Installation Tasks 3-3 Drive CRU Device IDs for Each Controller or Adapter 3-5 Modular Storage System Component Weights 3-8 Environmental Requirements for the Tape Drive Module 3-9 AC Power Requirements for the Tape Drive CRU 3-9 AC Power Cord Current and Voltage Ratings 3-10 Modular Tape System Connecting Tasks 3-22 Common 5190 and 5194 Tape Drive Operations 4-2 Environmental Requirements for Cartridge Tapes 4-2 ACL Front-Panel Status Indicator LEDs 4-8 ACL Operator Buttons 4-9 Cartridge Position Indicator Codes 4-10 5190 and 5194 Tape Drive CRU Front-Panel Status Indicator LEDs 4-23 Operator Message Types and Priorities 4-29 Common Operator Messages 4-29 Error Messages and Check Codes 4-30 Methods for Controlling Compression on a 5190 Tape Drive 4-45 Buffered Mode Performance 4-56 Troubleshooting a BEB 6-2 Component Part Numbers A-1 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 viii What’s New in This Manual Manual Information 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual Abstract This manual describes the 5190/5194 modular tape subsystem and its components. It includes technical information and procedures for installing, operating, and configuring the subsystem on Compaq NonStop™ Himalaya servers. This manual is written for anyone who is responsible for installing, configuring, or managing the 5190/5194 modular tape subsystem. Product Version N.A. Supported Releases This manual supports D40.00 and all subsequent D4x releases and G06.09 and all subsequent G-series releases until otherwise indicated by its replacement publication. Part Number Published 426878-002 May 2002 Document History Part Number Product Version Published 111154 N.A. May 1995 129451 N.A. December 1996 424962-001 N.A. May 2000 426878-001 N.A. July 2000 426878-002 N.A. May 2002 New and Changed Information This edition of the manual has been revised to include new information for the G06.16 release. References to specific NonStop Himalaya server models have been broadened to include the NonStop Himalaya S76000 and S86000 servers. Clarification has been added about setting the compression mode on and off. The appearance of the manual has been changed. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 ix What’s New in This Manual New and Changed Information 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 x About This Manual This manual describes how to install, operate, and maintain the 5190/5194 modular tape subsystem. Who Should Use This Manual This manual is intended for users of NonStop Himalaya K-series and S-series servers who want to perform the following functions on the 5190/5194 modular tape subsystem: • • • • System planning and installation Configuration System management Operation What Is in This Manual Table 1 summarizes the contents of this manual. Table 1. Summary of Contents (page 1 of 2) Section Title This section . . . 1 Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem Introduces the modular tape subsystem and the components that make up and support the subsystem. It is designed to familiarize you with the modular tape subsystem before you install or operate the subsystem. 2 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Tells you how to configure the modular tape subsystem. It includes configuration forms and provides examples for configuring the subsystem using either the Configuration Utility Program (COUP) or the Subsystem Control Facility (SCF). 3 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Tells you how to plan for and install the modular tape subsystem. It includes hardware installation and configuration procedures. Read the entire section before installing the subsystem. 4 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Provides basic operating procedures for the 5190 and 5194 tape drives and the automatic cartridge loader (ACL). 5 Using TMDS or the TSM Package Describes Compaq Tandem Maintenance and Diagnostic System (TMDS) and Compaq Tandem Service Management (TSM) support for the modular tape subsystem. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 xi What Is in This Manual About This Manual Table 1. Summary of Contents (page 2 of 2) Section Title This section . . . 6 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Tells you how to add, remove, and replace customer-replaceable units (CRUs) that make up the modular tape subsystem. A Part Numbers Lists the part numbers for customer-replaceable units (CRUs) and other components of the 5190/5194 modular tape subsystem. B Blank Configuration Forms Contains blank configuration forms for a 3216 tape controller BIC and an MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC. This manual also contains a glossary of technical terms and abbreviations used throughout the text. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 xii Where to Get More Information About This Manual Where to Get More Information For more information about NonStop Himalaya servers and tape subsystems, refer to the following manuals: NonStop Himalaya K-Series Server Manuals NonStop Himalaya S-Series Server Manuals For general information about configuring tape drives: Dynamic System Configuration (DSC) Manual System Generation Manual for Disk and Tape Devices SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem For information about managing tape drives: Peripheral Utility Program (PUP) Reference Manual TMDS Reference Manual SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem Guardian Disk and Tape Utilities Reference Manual TSM Online User Guide DSM/Tape Catalog Operator Interface (MEDIACOM) Manual TSM online help DSM/Tape Catalog User’s Guide Guardian System Operations Guide For information about configuring NonStop Himalaya servers: Himalaya K100/K200 Planning and Configuration Guide Himalaya S-Series Planning and Configuration Guide Himalaya K1000/K2000 Planning and Configuration Guide Himalaya K1000SE/K2000SE Configuration Guide Himalaya K1000SE/K2000SE Configuration Guide Configuring Controllers for NonStop Systems 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 xiii Your Comments Invited About This Manual Your Comments Invited After using this manual, please take a moment to send us your comments. You can do this by: • • • Completing a Contact NonStop Himalaya Publications form online at http://nonstop.compaq.com/view.asp?FOID=20. Faxing or mailing the form, which is included as a separate file in Total Information Manager (TIM) collections and located at the back of printed manuals. Our fax number and mailing address are included on the form. Sending an e-mail message to the address included on the form. We will immediately acknowledge receipt of your message and send you a detailed response as soon as possible. Be sure to include your name, company name, address, and phone number in your message. If your comments are specific to a particular manual, also include the part number and title of the manual. Many of the improvements you see in manuals are a result of suggestions from our customers. Please take this opportunity to help us improve future manuals. Notation Conventions Hypertext Links Blue underline is used to indicate a hypertext link within text. By clicking a passage of text with a blue underline, you are taken to the location described. For example: For information on connecting cables to the tape drive CRU, see Connecting the Modular Tape Subsystem on page 3-22. General Syntax Notation The following list summarizes the notation conventions for syntax presentation in this manual. UPPERCASE LETTERS. Uppercase letters indicate keywords and reserved words; enter these items exactly as shown. Items not enclosed in brackets are required. For example: MAXATTACH lowercase italic letters. Lowercase italic letters indicate variable items that you supply. Items not enclosed in brackets are required. For example: file-name 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 xiv General Syntax Notation About This Manual computer type. Computer type letters within text indicate C and Open System Services (OSS) keywords and reserved words; enter these items exactly as shown. Items not enclosed in brackets are required. For example: myfile.c italic computer type. Italic computer type letters within text indicate C and Open System Services (OSS) variable items that you supply. Items not enclosed in brackets are required. For example: pathname [ ] Brackets. Brackets enclose optional syntax items. For example: TERM [\system-name.]$terminal-name INT[ERRUPTS] A group of items enclosed in brackets is a list from which you can choose one item or none. The items in the list may be arranged either vertically, with aligned brackets on each side of the list, or horizontally, enclosed in a pair of brackets and separated by vertical lines. For example: FC [ num ] [ -num ] [ text ] K [ X | D ] address { } Braces. A group of items enclosed in braces is a list from which you are required to choose one item. The items in the list may be arranged either vertically, with aligned braces on each side of the list, or horizontally, enclosed in a pair of braces and separated by vertical lines. For example: LISTOPENS PROCESS { $appl-mgr-name } { $process-name } ALLOWSU { ON | OFF } | Vertical Line. A vertical line separates alternatives in a horizontal list that is enclosed in brackets or braces. For example: INSPECT { OFF | ON | SAVEABEND } … Ellipsis. An ellipsis immediately following a pair of brackets or braces indicates that you can repeat the enclosed sequence of syntax items any number of times. For example: M address [ , new-value ]… [ - ] {0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9}… An ellipsis immediately following a single syntax item indicates that you can repeat that syntax item any number of times. For example: "s-char…" 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 xv Notation for Messages About This Manual Punctuation. Parentheses, commas, semicolons, and other symbols not previously described must be entered as shown. For example: error := NEXTFILENAME ( file-name ) ; LISTOPENS SU $process-name.#su-name Quotation marks around a symbol such as a bracket or brace indicate the symbol is a required character that you must enter as shown. For example: "[" repetition-constant-list "]" Item Spacing. Spaces shown between items are required unless one of the items is a punctuation symbol such as a parenthesis or a comma. For example: CALL STEPMOM ( process-id ) ; If there is no space between two items, spaces are not permitted. In the following example, there are no spaces permitted between the period and any other items: $process-name.#su-name Line Spacing. If the syntax of a command is too long to fit on a single line, each continuation line is indented three spaces and is separated from the preceding line by a blank line. This spacing distinguishes items in a continuation line from items in a vertical list of selections. For example: ALTER [ / OUT file-spec / ] LINE [ , attribute-spec ]... Notation for Messages The following list summarizes the notation conventions for the presentation of displayed messages in this manual. Bold Text. Bold text in an example indicates user input entered at the terminal. For example: ENTER RUN CODE ?123 CODE RECEIVED: 123.00 The user must press the Return key after typing the input. Nonitalic text. Nonitalic letters, numbers, and punctuation indicate text that is displayed or returned exactly as shown. For example: Backup Up. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 xvi Notation for Messages About This Manual lowercase italic letters. Lowercase italic letters indicate variable items whose values are displayed or returned. For example: p-register process-name [ ] Brackets. Brackets enclose items that are sometimes, but not always, displayed. For example: Event number = number [ Subject = first-subject-value ] A group of items enclosed in brackets is a list of all possible items that can be displayed, of which one or none might actually be displayed. The items in the list might be arranged either vertically, with aligned brackets on each side of the list, or horizontally, enclosed in a pair of brackets and separated by vertical lines. For example: proc-name trapped [ in SQL | in SQL file system ] { } Braces. A group of items enclosed in braces is a list of all possible items that can be displayed, of which one is actually displayed. The items in the list might be arranged either vertically, with aligned braces on each side of the list, or horizontally, enclosed in a pair of braces and separated by vertical lines. For example: obj-type obj-name state changed to state, caused by { Object | Operator | Service } process-name State changed from old-objstate to objstate { Operator Request. } { Unknown. } | Vertical Line. A vertical line separates alternatives in a horizontal list that is enclosed in brackets or braces. For example: Transfer status: { OK | Failed } % Percent Sign. A percent sign precedes a number that is not in decimal notation. The % notation precedes an octal number. The %B notation precedes a binary number. The %H notation precedes a hexadecimal number. For example: %005400 %B101111 %H2F P=%p-register E=%e-register 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 xvii Change Bar Notation About This Manual Change Bar Notation Change bars are used to indicate substantive differences between this edition of the manual and the preceding edition. Change bars are vertical rules placed in the right margin of changed portions of text, figures, tables, examples, and so on. Change bars highlight new or revised information. For example: Compression can increase cartridge capacity typically by a factor of two. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 xviii 1 Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem This section introduces the modular tape subsystem and the components that make up and support the subsystem. You use this section to learn about the subsystem. If you understand the components in the subsystem, you are more likely to install and operate it successfully. Terms that appear in bold are defined in the glossary of this manual. This section includes the following topics: Topic Page Overview 1-1 The 5190 and 5194 Cartridge Tape Drives 1-2 The Automatic Cartridge Loader 1-7 The Modular Storage System 1-8 5190/5194 NonStop Himalaya K-Series Interface Components 1-10 5190/5194 NonStop Himalaya S-Series Interface Components 1-13 Unless stated otherwise, each topic applies to both NonStop Himalaya K-series servers and NonStop Himalaya S-series servers. Overview The modular tape subsystem can contain one or two cartridge tape drives packaged in a stackable modular enclosure. For ease of servicing, the cartridge tape drive and its power supply comes packaged as a Class-2 customer-replaceable unit (CRU), which can be removed and replaced without special training (see Service Classes of Components on page 3-1). Only the face of the tape drive CRU, containing the drive front panel and operator buttons, is visible. One or two tape drive CRUs fit inside a tape drive module, which forms the building block for the modular storage system. The 5190 and 5194 cartridge tape drives in a modular tape subsystem are attached to servers using the following: NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers • • Differential small computer system interface (SCSI) port on a multifunction controller (MFC) Fiber-optic cable on a 3216 tape controller NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers • • • Differential SCSI port on a PMF CRU or IOMF CRU 6761 fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC) on a 6760 ServerNet device adapter (ServerNet D/A) 6762 SCSI plug-in card (S-PIC) on a 6760 ServerNet D/A 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1 -1 Supported Releases Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem Supported Releases Table 1-1 lists the software releases that support 519x tape drives. Table 1-1. Releases Supporting 5190 and 5194 Tape Drives Tape Drive Server Type Supporting Releases 5190 and 5194 NonStop Himalaya S-series G01.00 and later G-series when attached to a PMF CRU or IOMF CRU G06.01 and later G-series when attached to a 6761 F-PIC on a 6760 ServerNet D/A G06.04 and later G-series when attached to a 6762 S-PIC on a 6760 ServerNet D/A 5194 NonStop Himalaya K-series D30.01+ and later D-series 5190 NonStop Himalaya K-series D20.00 and later D-series when the 5190 tape drive is connected to a 3216 controller D20.02 and later D-series when the 5190 tape drive is connected to an MFC The front panels of 5190 and 5194 tape drive CRUs look alike. The only visible difference is the part number label on the lower left side of the front panel. If you have both types of tape drives, consider putting an identifying sticker on each tape drive CRU to help identify it. The 5190 and 5194 Cartridge Tape Drives The cartridge tape drives are the heart of the modular tape subsystem. The tape drives use cartridges compatible with the IBM 18-track 3480 and 36-track 3490 data storage and recording formats. The 5194 tape drive significantly increases the amount of data that can be written to tape. The 5194 tape drive writes 36 tracks of data (as compared to 18 for the 5190 tape drive), doubling the amount of data per tape. The 5194 tape drive can also write on extended or “thin tape” media (compatible with the IBM 3490E format), which again doubles the amount of storable data, resulting in four times the amount of data on each tape compared to a 5190 tape drive. Each tape drive features a loading and unloading mechanism that accepts cartridges in the same way a videocassette recorder does. A message panel and operator buttons let you perform simple load and rewind functions. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1 -2 Cartridges Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 1-1 shows two tape drive CRUs in a tape drive module supported by a pedestal. Figure 1-1. Tape Drive Module With Two Tape Drive CRUs Tape Drive Module Cartridge Tape Drives Pedestal VST001.vsd Cartridges A cartridge is a storage device that contains either magnetic tape or a cleaning ribbon inside a protective case. The cartridge protects the tape or ribbon and makes handling easier. There are two types of cartridges: cleaning cartridges and cartridge tapes. Appendix A, Part Numbers, lists part numbers. Cleaning Cartridges Cleaning cartridges are used to clean the tape drive recording heads with a cleaning ribbon. Cleaning cartridges are discussed more fully under Cleaning a Tape Drive With an ACL on page 4-27, and Replacing a Cleaning Cartridge in an ACL on page 6-10. Cartridge Tapes Cartridge tapes hold magnetic storage media for the modular tape subsystem. A cartridge tape is a self-contained plastic shell containing a spool of chromium-dioxide-coated tape. Tape is nested in the cartridge by a spring-loaded mechanism that exposes the tape only when the cartridge is loaded into the drive. The 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1 -3 Tape Compatibility Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem drive mechanism uses a leader block to wind the tape through the tape path inside the drive. To view the parts of a cartridge, see Figure 1-2. Figure 1-2. A Cartridge Tape Cartridge Housing Label Side Reel Side File-Protect Thumbwheel Leader Block Leader Block Latch VST007.vsd There are two types of cartridge tape: • • The standard cartridge tape (IBM 3480 and 3490 compatible) can be used with both the 5190 and 5194 tape drives. The extended cartridge tape (IBM 3490E compatible) can be used only by the 5194 tape drive. Both types of cartridges have the following approximate dimensions: • • • Height: Width: Depth: 2.5 centimeters (1 inch) 10.9 centimeters (4.3 inches) 12.7 centimeters (5 inches) But they are not interchangeable. You can tell the difference between the cartridges by the color of the cartridge housing: the standard cartridge housing is all one color, whereas the extended cartridge housing has a lighter color on the bottom or reel side. Tape Compatibility Standard (IBM 3480/3490 compatible) cartridge tapes can be used by either the 5190 or 5194 tape drive. The 5194 tape drive can read cartridges written in the 18-track format by the 5190 tape drive, but it cannot write 18-track format tapes. The 5190 tape drive cannot read the 36-track tape format written by the 5194 tape drive. The extended “thin tape” (IBM 3490E compatible) is a special tape that can be used only on the 5194 tape drive. The 5190 tape drive cannot read or write on the extended tape cartridge. Although you can load the thin tape into the 5190 tape drive, data errors 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1 -4 Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem will occur if an application attempts to read or write. Table 1-2 summarizes 5190 and 5194 cartridge tape compatibility. Table 1-2. 5190 and 5194 Cartridge Tape Compatibility Tape Drive Read 18-Track Format Write 18-Track Format Read and Write 36-Track Format on Standard and Thin Tape Media 5190 Yes Yes No 5194 Yes No Yes Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes The modular tape subsystem can use both labeled and unlabeled cartridge tapes. A tape label is a record at the beginning of a tape that identifies the tape volume and the files it contains. An expiration date protects labeled-tape information from being accidentally overwritten. A scratch tape is a labeled tape with an expiration date that has passed. If a tape has no standard label, it is considered unlabeled. You should use labeled tapes with the modular tape subsystem because they can be cataloged and offer security features for protecting data. The operating system supports two standard tape-label formats: • • ANSI IBM-MVS For information about labeled-tape operations, see Using the MEDIACOM Utility for Labeled-Tape Operations on page 4-42. Data Compression The 5190 tape drive can write compressed or uncompressed information to labeled or unlabeled tape. The 5194 tape drive always operates in compression mode. Compression can increase cartridge capacity typically by a factor of two. Compression is further described under Controlling Data Compression (5190 Tape Drive) on page 4-44. The 5190 and 5194 drive CRUs write and read tapes that are compatible with the IBM 3480 and 3490 Improved Data Recording Capability (IDRC) compression format. IDRC is a data compression technique that lets you to store more data on each cartridge. Writing compressed data on tape is the only mode of the 5194 tape drive, which means the tape drive compresses data whenever possible. When using the 5194 tape drive (assuming you use an extended tape and compression for the first time), you can store much more data than on a 5190 tape drive. The exact amount of data stored on tape is not predictable, because the amount of compression varies with the data being written. Because the amount of compressed data stored on tape can vary significantly, some comparisons between the 5190 and 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1 -5 Performance Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem 5194 tape drives are quoted for uncompressed (native mode) data although the 5194 tape drive compresses data whenever possible. Table 1-3 summarizes cartridge storage capacities, assuming compression doubling. Table 1-3. Cartridge Capacities Cartridge Type 5190 (Uncompressed) 5190 (Compressed) 5194 (Always Compressed) IBM 3480 compatible Up to 200 MB Up to 400 MB Up to 800 MB IBM 3490E compatible N/A N/A Up to 1.6 GB Performance The operational speeds of the 5190 and 5194 tape drives do not differ significantly. An operational time difference might occur as a result of either longer searches on 36-track tape or saved rewind time. Because the 5194 36-track tape drive writes 18-track data to the end of the physical tape and then continues writing 18-track data back to the beginning of tape, minimal rewind time is required if the tape is written or read from beginning to end. The modular tape subsystem has the following characteristics: • Higher reliability than conventional open-reel tape • Compatibility with IBM 3480, 3490, and 3490E recording formats • Density of 38,000 bits/inch (bpi) • Data compression as a standard feature • • • Optional automatic cartridge loader (ACL) for unattended loading of up to seven cartridges 3.0 to 4.5 megabytes/second device-to-media formatted data-transfer rate (this rate is doubled when connected through a 6762 S-PIC on a 6760 ServerNet D/A) 10 megabytes/second unformatted burst data-transfer rate 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1 -6 The Automatic Cartridge Loader Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem The Automatic Cartridge Loader An optional automatic cartridge loader (ACL) can be attached to the cartridge tape drive for unattended loading and unloading of cartridge tapes. This option is available from the factory as part of the tape drive CRU or as an upgrade installed in the field by a trained service provider. The ACL uses a removable cartridge magazine to store seven cartridges. Within the ACL, an elevator mechanism (the autoloader) loads and unloads tapes from the magazine in response to commands from the front panel or the system. ACLs have the same operator controls as the 5190 and 5194 drives plus several additional controls. For a description of how to operate the ACL, see Operating a Tape Drive With an ACL on page 4-5. Figure 1-3 shows a tape drive module in which both drive CRUs are equipped with ACLs. In this configuration, only the front panel of the ACL is visible from the front of the unit. The drive is mounted to the rear of the ACL inside the drive CRU. Figure 1-3. Tape Drive Module With Two Tape Drive CRUs With ACLs Tape Drive Module Automatic Cartridge Loaders (ACLs) 43.3 cm (17 inches) 7150 Pedestal VST003.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1 -7 Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem The Modular Storage System The Modular Storage System The modular storage system provides a framework for housing the modular tape subsystem and other storage devices. This framework consists of low-cost, common-form-factor modules that can be vertically stacked in an external support structure. Each module in the modular storage system is self-contained in terms of cooling and power distribution. Therefore, you can stack cartridge tape, open-reel tape, and disk modules in the same support structure, and you can add and remove modules from the stack as necessary. Figure 1-3 on page 1-7 shows one tape drive module, containing two drive CRUs, supported by a 7150 pedestal. In this configuration, the tape drives are fairly low: the 7150 pedestal is 43.3 cm (17 inches) high. To raise the tape drives for easier access, you can use the 7159 pedestal, which is 8.13 cm (3.2 inches) higher, or you can add a 7158 frame between the 7150 pedestal and the tape drive module. The 7158 frame would add 38.4 cm (15.12 inches) to the height of the tape drives. Figure 1-4 shows a stack of two tape drive modules supported by a pedestal. The support structure for each module consists of vertical and horizontal support members that form a load-bearing frame for the storage modules. Up to three tape drive modules can be stacked in one support structure. The pedestal provides casters and leveling legs for the structure. Power and I/O cables are routed through the rear vertical support members, simplifying cable routing. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1 -8 The Modular Storage System Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 1-4. Modular Storage System Stack With Two Tape Drive Modules and Two ACLs Tape Drive Module with Two ACLs Tape Drive Module with Two Tape Drive CRUs Pedestal VST002.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1 -9 5190/5194 NonStop Himalaya K-Series Interface Components Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem 5190/5194 NonStop Himalaya K-Series Interface Components The modular tape drive CRU communicates with a NonStop Himalaya K-series server through one of the following: • • A multifunction controller (MFC) with SCSI cable A 3216 tape controller with fiber-optic cable Table 1-4 compares features and requirements. NonStop Himalaya K-series cables are not interchangeable with NonStop Himalaya S-series cables. Their part numbers are listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. Table 1-4. Tape Controller Comparison for NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers Tape Controller Cable Type Cable Length Drives Supported MFC SCSI 3 meters (10 feet) to 23 meters (75 feet) One Up to 2 km One or two 3216 controller Fiberoptic Notes MFCs are standard in all system cabinets except K10000 or K20000 (MC-32 I/O) cabinets. A SCSI BIC is required for the MFC. Controller must be purchased separately. A back-end board (BEB) is required for the 3216 controller. Multifunction Controller (MFC) Unlike dedicated I/O controllers, the MFC manages several types of devices, including disk and tape drives, terminals, printers, workstations, and communications lines to remote systems. The MFC consists of two boards: a logic board (LB) and a backplane interconnect card (BIC). You access the logic board from the front of a system or I/O cabinet. You access the BIC from the rear of a system or I/O cabinet. As stated in Table 1-1 on page 1-2, the 5190 and 5194 tape drives are supported by different software releases: • • D20.02 or later D-series release is required for the 5190 tape drive with the MFC. D30.01+ or later D-series release is required for the 5194 tape drive with the MFC. Each MFC can operate only one tape drive CRU. Each tape drive CRU in a module must be attached to a different MFC using separate SCSI cables. The MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC has a 50-pin connector for communicating with the cartridge tape drive through a cable. Figure 1-5 shows the MFC logic board and RS-232/SCSI BIC. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1-10 SCSI Cable (MFC) Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem SCSI Cable (MFC) A SCSI cable connects the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC to a SCSI port at the rear of the tape drive CRU. The MFC permits cable lengths of 10 feet (3 meters) and 75 feet (23 meters). Appendix A, Part Numbers, lists the SCSI cable part numbers. Figure 1-5. MFC Logic Board and RS-232/SCSI BIC Connector for Cartridge Tape Drive Connector for Diagnostic Line Connector for Communications Line Connectors for Terminals, Printers, or Workstations MFC Logic Board MFC RS-232 / SCSI BIC VST004.vsd 3216 Tape Controller The 3216 tape controller manages input/output (I/O) operations for a modular tape subsystem. The controller consists of two boards: a logic board (LB) and a backplane interconnect card (BIC). You access the logic board from the front of a system or I/O cabinet. You access the BIC from the rear of a system or I/O cabinet. As stated in Table 1-1 on page 1-2, the 5190 and 5194 tape drives are supported by different software releases: • • D20.00 or later D-series release is required for the 5190 tape drive with the 3216 controller. D30.01+ or later D-series release is required for the 5194 tape drive with the 3216 controller. The 3216 tape controller provides a fiber-optic link up to two kilometers long between the controller BIC and the tape drive CRU. Cable lengths greater than 500 meters must be customer-supplied (see SCSI Extender for Fiber-Optic Cable on page 1-13). 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1-11 Back-End Board (3216 Controller) Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem Each 3216 tape controller supports one or two drive CRUs. Figure 1-6 shows the 3216 logic board and BIC. Figure 1-6. 3216 Logic Board and Fiber-Optic BIC Red Fault LED Green Power-On LED 3216 Logic Board 3216 BIC VST005.vsd Back-End Board (3216 Controller) The back-end board (BEB) translates fiber-optic signals from the 3216 controller into SCSI commands and information for the cartridge tape drive. A cage-like sheet-metal enclosure houses the BEB and plugs into a SCSI port on the back of the drive CRU. The BEB enclosure is visible only when the hinged door on the rear of the module (the rear bezel door) is lowered. For an illustration of a BEB, see Figure 3-13 on page 3-25. One BEB can serve one or two drive CRUs. If a module contains two drive CRUs, a daisy-chain cable links the SCSI port on the rear of the first drive CRU to a port on the rear of the second drive CRU. The BEB contains four light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Two LEDs are external (easily viewed at the back of the BEB cage) and two smaller LEDs are mounted internally on the circuit board of the BEB. The internal LEDs are used by trained service providers. You do not need to use the internal LEDs to troubleshoot the BEB. All BEB LEDs are visible if the hinged door on the rear of the module is lowered or removed. For a description of the BEB LEDs, see Replacing a BEB on page 6-2. For BEB problem-solving using these LEDs, see Troubleshooting a BEB on page 6-2. Fiber-Optic Cable A duplex fiber-optic cable connects the 3216 BIC to the BEB at the rear of the tape drive module. Cable lengths can range from 10 meters (33 feet, the default length) to 2 kilometers (1.2 miles). Part numbers for fiber-optic cables are listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1-12 SCSI Extender for Fiber-Optic Cable Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem SCSI Extender for Fiber-Optic Cable For cable lengths from 500 meters to 2 kilometers, contact your service provider. If you want a third party to install the cable, use the 2-kilometer Cable Specification listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. 5190/5194 NonStop Himalaya S-Series Interface Components The modular tape drive CRU communicates with a NonStop Himalaya S-series server through one of the following: • • • A SCSI ServerNet addressable controller (SAC) in a processor multifunction (PMF) CRU or I/O multifunction (IOMF) CRU, using SCSI cable A 6761 F-PIC installed in a 6760 ServerNet/DA, using fiber-optic cable A 6762 S-PIC installed in a 6760 ServerNet/DA, using SCSI cable Caution. Avoid daisy-chaining tape drives on NonStop Himalaya S-series servers, because tape performance is limited by competing server tasks like disk I/O activity. Table 1-5 compares features and requirements. NonStop Himalaya S-series cables are not interchangeable with NonStop Himalaya K-series cables. Their part numbers are listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. Table 1-5. Interface Component Comparison for NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers Interface Component Cable Type Cable Length Drives Supported SCSI SAC in PMF CRU or IOMF CRU SCSI 3 meters (10 feet) to 23 meters (75 feet) One or two Notes The PMF CRU or IOMF CRU manages tape operations on the modular tape subsystem. The SCSI SAC is part of the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU. You can use TSM to check the adapter hardware. 6761 F-PIC in 6760 adapter fiberoptic 2 to 500 meters One or two You can use TSM to check the adapter hardware. 6762 S-PIC in 6760 adapter SCSI 3 to 23 meters One or two You can use TSM to check the adapter hardware. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1-13 Processor Multifunction (PMF) CRU Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem Processor Multifunction (PMF) CRU You can attach a tape drive CRU to the SCSI port on a PMF CRU. Figure 1-7 shows the location of SCSI ports on different NonStop Himalaya S-series processor enclosures. The drawing on the left shows the location of SCSI ports on processor enclosures for those systems that use ServerNet 1 technology, such as NonStop Himalaya S7000, S7400, S70000, and S72000. The drawing on the right shows the location of SCSI ports for those systems that use ServerNet 2 technology, such as NonStop Himalaya S74000, S76000, and S86000. Figure 1-7. NonStop Himalaya S-Series Processor Enclosures Service Side of Processor Enclosures Using ServerNet 1 Technology Service Side of Processor Enclosures Using ServerNet 2 Technology 5 0 5 5 SCSI Ports VST042.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1-14 I/O Multifunction (IOMF) CRU Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem I/O Multifunction (IOMF) CRU You can also attach a tape drive CRU to the SCSI port on an IOMF CRU. Figure 1-7 shows a NonStop Himalaya S-series I/O enclosure with two IOMF CRUs. Figure 1-8. NonStop Himalaya S-Series I/O Enclosure I/O Enclosure (Service Side) IOMF CRU SCSI Port IOMF CRU SCSI Port VST970.vsd SCSI Cable (PMF CRU, IOMF CRU, or 6760 Adapter) Copper SCSI cable is used to connect a tape drive CRU to a PMF CRU, IOMF CRU, or an 6762 S-PIC in 6760 adapter. On NonStop Himalaya S7000, S7400, S70000, or S72000 PMF CRUs or IOMF CRUs, one end of the cable has a connector with latch-clip flanges that connects to the uncapped SCSI port at the rear of the tape drive CRU. The other end of the cable has a connector with thumbscrews that connects to the SCSI passthrough terminator that is preinstalled on the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU differential SCSI port. On all other PMF CRUs for NonStop Himalaya S-series servers, the SCSI terminator is located inside the PMF CRU and is not visible. The SCSI cable comes in a separate box when the tape subsystem is delivered. SCSI cable lengths can range from 10 feet (3 meters) to 75 feet (23 meters). Appendix A, Part Numbers, lists part numbers. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1-15 Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem SCSI Extender for Fiber-Optic Cable SCSI Extender for Fiber-Optic Cable For cable lengths from 500 meters to 2 kilometers, contact your service provider. If you want a third party to install the cable, use the 2-kilometer Cable Specification listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. Back-End Board (6760 Adapter) The back-end board (BEB) translates fiber-optic signals from the 6760 ServerNet adapter into SCSI commands and information for the cartridge tape drive. A cage-like sheet-metal enclosure houses the BEB and plugs into a SCSI port on the back of the drive CRU. The BEB enclosure is visible only when the hinged door on the rear of the module (the rear bezel door) is lowered. For an illustration of a BEB, see Figure 3-13 on page 3-25. One BEB can serve one drive CRU. The BEB contains four light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Two LEDs are external (easily viewed at the back of the BEB cage) and two smaller LEDs are mounted internally on the circuit board of the BEB. The internal LEDs are used by trained service providers. You do not need to use the internal LEDs to troubleshoot the BEB. All BEB LEDs are visible if the hinged door on the rear of the module is lowered or removed. For a description of the BEB LEDs, see Replacing a BEB on page 6-2. For BEB problem-solving using these LEDs, see Troubleshooting a BEB on page 6-2. Fiber-Optic Cable (6760 Adapter) A duplex fiber-optic cable connects the 6760 ServerNet adapter to the BEB at the rear of the tape drive module. Cable lengths can range from 10 meters (33 feet, the default length) to 2 kilometers (1.2 miles). Part numbers for fiber-optic cables are listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 1-16 2 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem This section shows you how to configure the modular tape subsystem for NonStop Himalaya K-series servers (on page 2-1) and NonStop Himalaya S-series servers (on page 2-18). Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem for NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers This subsection describes how to configure the modular tape subsystem if you plan to connect a tape drive to either a multifunction controller (MFC) or 3216 tape controller. Topic Page Completing the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram 2-1 Completing the 3216 Controller BIC Diagram 2-4 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP 2-7 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File 2-13 Completing the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram If you plan to attach a tape drive to an MFC, you should document the installation using an MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram. Appendix B, Blank Configuration Forms, contains a blank MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram. Figure 2-1 on page 2-3 shows an example of a completed diagram. For more information about completing BIC diagrams or configuring controllers, refer to Configuring Controllers for NonStop Systems. You can attach only one tape drive to an MFC, and the tape drive must have a device ID of 5. To complete the BIC diagram, first make a photocopy of the form for each MFC to be used as a tape drive controller. Then complete the entries as described in the following paragraphs. (You are authorized to photocopy forms only for the purpose of installing and configuring your system.) Identify the System, Cabinet Number, and Section Number In the upper right corner of the form, enter the system name on the System Name line and the cabinet number on the Cabinet Number line. If applicable, enter the section number on the Section Number line. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2 -1 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Completing the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram Identify the Controller The following paragraphs describe how to complete the controller identification lines at the top of the form. You identify an MFC by the part number of its logic board. The part number is entered in the logic board slot on the completed cabinet check list for the cabinet where the MFC is installed. Part numbers for the MFC are listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. • • • • Enter the logical device name of the MFC you are configuring on the Controller Name line. The MFC name is shown in the MFC logic board slot on the completed cabinet check list. Enter the controller number of the MFC on the Controller No. line. The controller number for this MFC is shown next to its logic board slot on the completed cabinet check list. Enter the MFC logic board slot number in the first blank of the LB/BIC Slot Number line. The slot number is shown next to the MFC logic board slot for this MFC on the completed cabinet check list. Enter the MFC BIC slot number in the second blank of the LB/BIC Slot Number line. The slot number is shown next to the MFC BIC slot for this MFC on the completed cabinet check list. J5 Connector (For a Tape Drive) Complete the information block for the J5 connector of the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC. Indicate that you are attaching a 5190 or 5194 tape drive. (Only one tape drive can be connected to an MFC.) • • • • • • • The unit number for the J5 connector on an MFC is always %5. This number refers to the unit to which the device is assigned. Enter the logical device and subdevice name (if you choose to use a subdevice name) of the tape drive on the Logical Device Name line. Enter the room number or other appropriate locator of the tape drive on the Physical Location of Device line. Enter the product number of the tape drive on the Product Number or Description of Device line. Enter the cable part number on the Cable Part Number line. Appendix A, Part Numbers, shows the part numbers for cables that connect a tape drive to the MFC. If you want to have the cable tagged when installed, enter the cable tag on the Cable ID Tag line. Enter any special instructions to the installer on the Comments line. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2 -2 Completing the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 2-1. Example of a Completed MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram \BRNCH System Name MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram MFC0 Controller Name 04 21 95 Date ____/____/____ %24 Controller No. Unit Number(s): %5 TP0 Physical Location of Device: 60 99 _____/______ 11937 Cable Part Number: $ 1A Cabinet Number LB/BIC Slot Number Logical Device Name: 1 Section Number (if applicable) Cable ID Tag: $TP0 Comments: 25 ft. cable ROOM 2239 Product Number or Description of Device: 5194 Cartridge Tape Drive J5 RMI Cable Part Number: Logical Device Name: $ Cable ID Tag: NOT Physical Location of Device: Comments: CONFIGURED Product Number or Description of Device: J4 Unit Number(s): %0,%1 Logical Device Name: $ Physical Location of Device: ROOM 2239 J3 44988 Cable Part Number: $SNFRAN Cable ID Tag: 25 ft. cable Comments: Product Number or Description of Device: RS-232 Modem Unit Number(s): J2 X25AM Access Method: SNFRAN %4,%5 Logical Device and Subdevice Name: $ .# Physical Location of Device: Interface: RS-232 Cable Part Number: or CL (Circle one) 13686 and Cable ID Tag: NOT CONFIGURED Comments: Product Number or Description of Device: J1 Unit Number(s): %2,%3 Logical Device and Subdevice Name: $ .# Physical Location of Device: Interface: RS-232 Cable Part Number: or CL (Circle one) 13686 and Cable ID Tag: Comments: NOT CONFIGURED Product Number or Description of Device: VST035.vsd J1, J2, J3, and J4 Connectors The remaining connectors are used for modems, communications lines, terminals, and printers. For detailed instructions about how to complete these parts of the form, refer to Configuring Controllers for NonStop Systems. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2 -3 Completing the 3216 Controller BIC Diagram Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Date the Form When you have completed this form, enter today’s date on the Date line. Completing the 3216 Controller BIC Diagram If you plan to attach a tape drive to a 3216 controller, document the installation using a 3216 Controller BIC Diagram. The following paragraphs contain the detailed procedure, including considerations and valid entries, for completing the 3216 Controller BIC Diagram. Appendix B, Blank Configuration Forms, contains a blank 3216 Controller BIC Diagram. Figure 2-2 on page 2-6 shows an example of a completed diagram. To complete the BIC diagram, first make a photocopy of the form for each 3216 controller that is controlling a tape drive. Then fill in the form as described in the following paragraphs. (You are authorized to photocopy forms only for the purpose of installing and configuring your system.) Identify the System and the Controller In the upper right corner of the form, enter the system name on the System Name line and the cabinet number on the Cabinet Number line. If applicable, enter the section number on the Section Number line. Then complete the controller identification lines at the top of the form: • • • • Enter the logical device name of the controller on the Controller Name line. Enter the controller number of the controller on the Controller No. line. Enter the controller logic board slot number in the first blank of the LB/BIC Slot Number line. To determine the controller logic board slot number, find this board (by part number) on the completed cabinet check list for the cabinet containing the controller. Part numbers are listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. Enter the controller BIC slot number in the second blank of the LB/BIC Slot Number line. To determine the BIC slot number, either use the following information, or find the BIC (by part number) on the completed cabinet check list for the cabinet containing the controller. In a NonStop Himalaya K2, K100, or K200 system cabinet: Controller Logic Board Slot Number 63 64 66 Corresponding BIC Slot Number 96 95 93 In a NonStop Himalaya K1000 or K2000 system cabinet: Controller Logic Board Slot Number 63 64 65 66 Corresponding BIC Slot Number 96 95 94 93 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2 -4 Completing the 3216 Controller BIC Diagram Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem In a NonStop Himalaya K1000, K2000, K10000, K1000SE, K20000, or K2000SE I/O cabinet: Controller Logic Board Slot Number 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Corresponding BIC Slot Number 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 Identify the Cable Connector Complete the information block or blocks for the cable connector. If you are connecting two tape drives to the 3216 controller, the second drive is connected by a daisy-chain cable to the first drive. The BIC diagram shows this connection by including two information blocks (one for each drive) connected to the same connector. • • • • • • • • • The unit number for the tape device is either %4 or %5. They are mapped to the device ID, which can be either 4 or 5. The default device ID is 5. Enter the logical device name of the tape drive on the Logical Device Name line. Enter the room number or other appropriate locator of the tape drive on the Physical Location of Device line. Enter the product number of the tape drive on the Product Number or Description of Device line. Enter the cable part number on the Cable Part Number line. For a list of cable part numbers for the 3216 controller, see Appendix A, Part Numbers. The default length for fiber-optic cables is 10 meters (33 feet). Longer lengths of fiber-optic cable must be specified when ordering. For cable lengths from 500 meters to 2 kilometers, contact your service provider. If you want a third party to install the cable, use the 2-kilometer Cable Specification listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. If you want to have the cable tagged when installed, enter the cable tag on the Cable ID Tag line. Enter any special instructions to the installer on the Comments line. Date the Form When you have completed this form, enter today’s date on the Date line. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2 -5 Completing the 3216 Controller BIC Diagram Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 2-2. Example of a Completed 3216 Controller BIC Diagram System Name 3216 Controller BIC Diagram Controller Name TAPECTLR0 Date 4 / 21 / Section Number (if applicable) Controller No.% 030 1A LB/BIC Slot Number 64 Cabinet Number 95 Unit Number(s): %4, %5 Logical Device Name: $ TAPE18 Physical Location of \EXAMPLE 1 / 95 Cable Part Number: F9-1OW 64351 Cable ID Tag: $TAPE18 5190 Comments: RM 2239 10-METER CABLE Product Number or Description of Device: 5190 TAPE DRIVE J1 Daisy-Chain Connection Unit Number(s): %4, %5 Cable Part Number: F9-10W 64351 Logical Device Name: $ TAPE36 Cable ID Tag: $TAPE36 5194 Physical Location of Device: Comments: RM 2239 10 METER CABLE Product Number or Description of Device: 5194 TAPE DRIVE VSTA01.vsd VST013.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2 -6 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP On NonStop Himalaya K-series servers, you can use the Configuration Utility Program (COUP) to configure a 5190 or 5194 cartridge tape drive dynamically—that is, without having to create a new system image and load it. COUP is the user interface to the Dynamic System Configuration (DSC) utility. COUP allows you to change some parts of your system configuration online, reducing the need to stop system operations to reconfigure. If you are a member of the super group (255,n), you can use COUP to perform online I/O reconfiguration from any connected terminal. Using COUP, you can: • • • • • Add or delete objects (such as a 3216 controller or a 5190 tape drive) in the system configuration Stop the I/O process for a tape drive Alter the characteristics of a tape drive Start the I/O process for a tape drive after altering its characteristics Obtain information about the current configuration Always use the product code 5190 when configuring either the 5190 or the 5194 tape drive with COUP. This subsection provides examples of configuring tape controllers and cartridge tape drives using COUP. The examples show how to define and add a controller and tape drive to a system configuration, start the tape drive, and remove the tape drive from the system. See the Dynamic System Configuration (DSC) Manual for a complete list of supported devices and for more information about COUP. Caution. Before using COUP, always make backup copies of your original OSIMAGE and OSCONFIG files. If you wish, create a log file of the COUP session so you can update the CONFTEXT configuration file the next time you do a system generation. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2 -7 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP Example 1: Defining and Adding a 3216 Logical Controller to an MFC If a tape drive is attached to a multifunction controller (MFC) and you want to add the tape drive to the configuration using COUP, you must first locate the MFC you want to use. Then you can use COUP to define and add a 3216 logical tape controller to that MFC. Using COUP to add a tape drive attached to an MFC requires updated MFC firmware. As stated in Table 1-1 on page 1-2, the system must have a D20.02 or later D-series software release in order to add a 5190 tape drive. To add a 5194 tape drive, the system must have a D30.01+ or later D-series software release. The following example shows the sequence of commands to enter for adding a 3216 logical controller named TAPEA to an MFC named MFUNC1 with a subchannel offset of %10. > COUP CONFIGURATION UTILITY PROGRAM - T9023D40 - (01MAR95) COPYRIGHT TANDEM COMPUTERS INCORPORATED 1987-1995 CONFIG $SYSTEM.SYS01.OSCONFIG SYSTEM \TEST 1) 2) 3) 4) ASSUME CONTROLLER SET PRODUCT 3216 SET MF_CONTROLLERNAME (NAME MFUNC1, OFFSET %10) SHOW PRODUCT 3216 MF_CONTROLLERNAME (NAME MFUNC1, OFFSET %010 ) 5) ADD TAPEA The following are notes about this example: • • The ASSUME command sets the object type so you don’t have to specify it in each command that follows. The SET commands define the attributes that you would define in the CONTROLLERS paragraph of the CONFTEXT file. These attributes are: ° ° ° • The SYSGENR product code for the logical controller (3216) The name of the MFC (MFUNC1, in this example) The offset from the start of the MFC’s subchannel address for the logical controller to be added (%10) The ADD command names the object you have defined (the name of the logical tape controller is TAPEA in this example) and adds it to the configuration file. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2 -8 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP Example 2: Defining and Adding a 3216 Controller You can use COUP to define and add a 3216 controller to your system after you install the controller. The following example defines and adds a 3216 controller (TAPEA) configured between processors 0 and 1 at subchannel address %040. > COUP CONFIGURATION UTILITY PROGRAM - T9023D40 - (01MAR95) SYSTEM \TEST COPYRIGHT TANDEM COMPUTERS INCORPORATED 1987-1995 CONFIG $SYSTEM.SYS01.OSCONFIG 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) ASSUME CONTROLLER SET PRODUCT 3216 SET PRIMARYCPU (CPU 0, ADDRESS %30) SET BACKUPCPU (CPU 1, ADDRESS %30) ADD TAPEA The following are notes about this example: • • • The ASSUME command sets the object type so you don’t have to specify it in each command that follows. The SET commands define the attributes that you would define in the CONTROLLERS paragraph of the CONFTEXT file. The ADD command names the object you have defined (the 3216 tape controller) and adds it to the configuration file. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2 -9 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP Example 3: Defining and Adding a Tape Drive After adding a controller for the tape drive (see the examples on page 2-8 and page 2-9) to your system configuration, you are ready to add a tape drive. The following example uses COUP to define and add a tape drive named $TAPE1 to the controller named TAPEA on the MFC. 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) ASSUME DEVICE SET PRODUCT 5190 SET CONTROLLERNAME TAPEA SET UNIT 5 SHOW PRODUCT 5190 CONTROLLERNAME TAPEA IOPOBJECT $SYSTEM.SYS01.OTPPROCP IOPLIBRARY TYPE 04 SUBTYPE 09 RSIZE 02048 UNIT 05 HIGHPIN ON DENSITY38000 TAPEMODESTREAM NOCOMPRESSION TAPE^OPENERS 4 11) ADD $TAPE1 The following are notes about this example: • • • • The ASSUME command sets the object type so you don’t have to specify it in each command that follows. The SET commands define the attributes that you would define in the PERIPHERALS paragraph of the CONFTEXT file: ° ° ° Product number Controller name Unit number The SHOW command lets you verify that you have set all required attributes. It identifies missing but required attributes with an asterisk (*). The ADD command names the device you have defined (the tape drive) and adds it to the configuration file. Considerations • • Always use 5190 as the product number when configuring either the 5190 or 5194 tape drive. Unit numbers are determined by the controller and must match the device ID of the drive. An MFC can control only one tape drive. Therefore, the only valid unit number for a drive attached to an MFC is 5. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 10 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP The 3216 controller can control one or two tape drives. If the controller manages only one drive, use the default unit number (5). If the controller manages two drives, use unit numbers 4 and 5. • Using COUP, you can specify compression as a device attribute for the 5190 tape drive. (The 5194 tape drive ignores this attribute, because it always operates in compression mode.) You can use these attributes in COUP to enable or disable compression: Attribute 5190 Tape Drive Action NOCOMPRESSION Data is written without compression COMPRESSION Data is written using IDRC compression The default attribute for the 5190 tape drive is NOCOMPRESSION. The COUP attribute establishes the default mode for the 5190 you are configuring. After you have configured the 5190 tape drive, you can override this setting, if you need to, in a number of ways. To see a description of each of the methods for enabling or disabling compression, see Controlling Data Compression (5190 Tape Drive) on page 4-44. Example 4: Starting a Tape Drive After adding a controller and device (as shown in the examples on page 2-8, page 2-9, and page 2-10), you must start it before the operating system can recognize it. In this example, the COUP START command starts an I/O process for the tape drive $TAPE1. Returned messages indicate that the tape drive has been started. 11) START $TAPE1 IOP for device $TAPE1 successfully started in CPU 0. IOP for device $TAPE1 successfully started in CPU 1. Device $TAPE1 has been successfully started. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 11 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP Example 5: Stopping and Removing a Tape Drive From the System To stop and remove a tape drive from the system, use the PUP DOWN command to bring down the drive. Then use COUP to stop and remove it from the system. The COUP STOP command stops the I/O process for that drive. You must also stop any processes communicating with that drive. After the STOP command stops the I/O process for that drive, a Peripheral Utility Program (PUP) LISTDEV command on the device will show that it is unknown to the system. The STOP command also marks the drive as stopped in the configuration file; the drive does not start after the next processor reload. You can use the COUP DELETE command to remove the definition of the drive from the configuration file. When you remove a drive from the system, you also need to remove its controller if there are no other devices attached to the controller. If you try to delete the controller while it still has a device connected to it, COUP issues an error message. This example stops and removes the tape drive $TAPE1 and controller TAPEA. 12) STOP $TAPE1 *** WARNING[ COUP116 ] : The following devices will be stopped: $TAPE1 Ok to proceed? : Y Device $TAPE1 has been successfully stopped. 13) DELETE $TAPE1 14) DELETE CONTROLLER TAPEA 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 12 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File On NonStop Himalaya K-series servers, if you want to add a 5190 or 5194 cartridge tape drive to your system configuration by running the Distributed Systems Management/Software Configuration Manager (DSM/SCM) program and create a new system image, you must define the characteristics of the tape drive and its controller for the system you are attaching them to. You change the system configuration by modifying the CONFTEXT file and running DSM/SCM to build the operating system software. The CONFTEXT file contains nine paragraphs, each consisting of a series of statements that define the system configuration. You must modify the following paragraphs to prepare the system for attaching a modular tape subsystem: • • • CONTROLLERS paragraph PERIPHERALS paragraph ALLPROCESSORS paragraph For more information about the DSM/SCM program, the CONFTEXT file, or configuring tape controllers, see the following manuals: • • • • • • • Himalaya K10000/K20000 Planning and Configuration Guide Himalaya K1000/K2000 Planning and Configuration Guide Himalaya K100/K200 Planning and Configuration Guide Configuring Controllers for NonStop Systems System Generation Manual for D4x Releases System Generation Manual for Disk and Tape Devices DSM/SCM User’s Guide Configuration Considerations Before configuring the modular tape subsystem, you should be aware that: • • • • • • The 5190 tape drive, when connected to a 3216 controller, requires a D20.00 or later D-series release. The 5190 tape drive, when connected to an MFC, requires a D20.02 or later D-series release. The 5194 tape drive requires a D30.01+ or later D-series release. Device type 4 and subtype 9 are used to configure both the 5190 and 5194 tape drives. The product number 5190 identifies both the 5190 and 5194 tape drives in the PERIPHERALS paragraph. The unit number for each tape drive must match the device ID configured during installation (the device ID is set using the operator buttons on the front panel of the tape drive CRU). 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 13 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem • • • • Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File Only one tape drive can be attached to an MFC. The drive must use device ID 5, which is the default device ID for tape drive CRUs. When two tape drives are attached to a 3216 controller, the drives must have device IDs 4 and 5. If only one drive is attached to a 3216 controller, then the device ID must be 5. See Tape Drive CRU Placement on page 3-6. The PERIPHERALS paragraph allows two modifiers: NOCOMPRESSION and COMPRESSION. These are valid only for the 5190 tape drive (the 5194 tape drive ignores this modifier because it is always in compression mode). See Modifying the PERIPHERALS Paragraph on page 2-16. Table 2-1 lists the subchannel address assigned to each I/O slot in a system cabinet and I/O cabinet for NonStop Himalaya K2, K100, K200, K1000, and K2000 servers. For an MFC, the subchannel address will already be specified in the MULTIFUNCTION_CONTROLLERS paragraph. For a 3216 tape controller, you must specify the subchannel address in the CONTROLLERS paragraph. To determine the subchannel address required for each I/O controller in the CONTROLLERS paragraph, use Table 2-1 or the following formula: subchannel address = %10 * (I/O controller number) Table 2-1. Subchannel Addresses for I/O Controllers System Cabinet I/O Slot Number Subchannel Address I/O Cabinet I/O Slot Number Subchannel Address 62 %040 (MFC) 60 %240 (MFC) 63 %030 61 %230 64 %020 62 %220 65 %120 63 %210 66 %130 64 %200 67 %140 (MFC) 65 %300 66 %310 67 %320 68 %330 69 %340 (MFC) For NonStop Himalaya K10000 and K20000 servers, the I/O subchannel address depends on the processor and the I/O channel configuration. See the Himalaya K10000/K20000 Planning and Configuration Guide. Memory Dump Considerations How the system is configured affects what devices are used for a memory dump. If you want to use a 5190 or 5194 tape drive to capture memory dumps, see Using a 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 14 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Memory Dump (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) on page 4-56. Tape Load Considerations How the system is configured affects what devices can be used for a tape load. If you want to perform a tape load with a 5190 or 5194 tape drive, verify that the system is properly set up to do it. For details, see Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Tape Load (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) on page 4-57. Modifying the MULTIFUNCTION_CONTROLLERS Paragraph For a multifunction controller (MFC), you need an entry in the MULTIFUNCTION_CONTROLLERS paragraph of your configuration file. 1. Specify the name of the multifunction controller (in the examples, MFUNC1). 2. Specify 3681 as the product number for the multifunction controller. 3. Specify the processor numbers and, for NonStop Himalaya K10000 and K20000 servers, the channel numbers. 4. Determine the subchannel address, using Table 2-1 on page 2-14. Example for the NonStop Himalaya K2, K100, K200, K1000, and K2000 servers: !Controller/ !CIU name ! MFUNC1 Product Number Processor Numbers Subchannel Address 3681 1,0 %140; !slot 67 Example for the NonStop Himalaya K10000, K1000SE, K20000, and K2000SE servers: !Controller/ !Name ! MFUNC1 Product Code Processors/ Channels Subchannel Address 3681 0.0,1.0 %240; !slot 60 Modifying the CONTROLLERS Paragraph The entry you need to make to the CONTROLLERS paragraph of your configuration file depends on which controller you are attaching the tape drive to. Multifunction Controller (MFC) 1. Specify the name of the logical tape controller (in the examples, TAPEA). 2. Specify 3216 as the product number for the logical tape controller. 3. Specify the name of the MFC to which the logical tape controller is attached (in the examples, MFUNC1). 4. Specify %010 for the offset. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 15 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Example of a CONTROLLERS paragraph entry for the NonStop Himalaya K2, K100, K200, K1000, and K2000 servers: !Controller/ !CIU name ! TAPEA Product Number Processor Numbers Subchannel Address 3216 MFUNC1 %010; Example of a CONTROLLERS paragraph entry for the NonStop Himalaya K10000, K1000SE, K20000, and K2000SE servers: !Controller/ !Name ! TAPEA Product Code Processors/ Channels Subchannel Address 3216 MFUNC1 %010; 3216 Controller 1. Specify the name of the controller. 2. Specify 3216 as the controller product code. 3. Specify the processors and, if applicable, the channel numbers on the controller. 4. Determine the subchannel address required for each 3216 controller (use Table 2-1 on page 2-14). Example of a CONTROLLERS paragraph entry for the NonStop Himalaya K2, K100, K200, K1000, and K2000 servers: !Controller/ !CIU name ! TAPEB Product Code Processor Numbers Subchannel Address 3216 0,1 %030; !slot 63 Example of a CONTROLLERS paragraph entry for the NonStop Himalaya K10000, K1000SE, K20000, and K2000SE servers: !Controller/ !Name ! TAPEB Product Code Processors/ Channels Subchannel Address 3216 0.0,1.0 %200; !slot 64 Modifying the PERIPHERALS Paragraph In the PERIPHERALS paragraph of the CONFTEXT configuration file, you specify the logical name of the tape drive, the name of the tape controller controlling the tape drive, the tape unit number, and the macro 5190 (specify 5190 for both the 5190 and 5194 tape drives). Use the following steps to add an entry to the PERIPHERALS paragraph of your configuration file. For more information about specifying PERIPHERALS paragraph entries for tape devices, see the System Generation Manual for Disk and Tape Devices. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 16 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem 1. Specify the logical device name of the tape drive. (The examples use $BACKUP and $DUMP.) 2. Specify the name of the controller for each drive. Use the controller name you specified in the CONTROLLERS paragraph. (Either the MFC logical tape controller or the 3216 tape controller. The examples use TAPEA for the MFC controller and TAPEB for the 3216 controller.) 3. Append the unit number to the controller name. A 5190 or 5194 tape drive attached to an MFC always uses unit number 5. The 3216 controller can support two tape drives with the unit numbers 4 and 5. The device ID configured during installation of the drive CRU must match the unit number. For more information on the device ID, see Checking and Setting the Device ID on page 3-41. 4. Specify 5190 as the macro name for both the 5190 and 5194 tape drives. 5. Specify the compression modifier following the macro name. This modifier is valid only for the 5190 tape drive. (Compression mode is always enabled for the 5194 tape drive.) The modifier enables or disables compression mode for the 5190 tape drive: Modifier 5190 Tape Drive Action NOCOMPRESSION Data is written without compression COMPRESSION Data is written using IDRC compression The default modifier is NOCOMPRESSION. For information about other ways to enable and disable compression, see Controlling Data Compression (5190 Tape Drive) on page 4-44. Example for a module with one tape drive CRU attached to an MFC: !Device !Name ! $BACKUP Controller/ Unit Number Macro Modifiers TAPEA.5 5190 COMPRESSION; Example for a module with one tape drive CRU attached to a 3216 tape controller: !Device !Name ! $DUMP Controller/ Unit Number Macro Modifiers TAPEB.5 5190 COMPRESSION; Example for a module with two tape drive CRUs attached to a 3216 tape controller: !Device !Name ! $BACKUP $DUMP Controller/ Unit Number Macro TAPEB.4 TAPEB.5 5190; 5190; Modifiers 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 17 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem for NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Modifying the ALLPROCESSORS Paragraph for Labeled-Tape Processing For the system to support labeled-tape operations, you must specify TAPE_LABEL_PROCESSING ENABLED in the ALLPROCESSORS paragraph of your CONFTEXT file. This entry routes all tape requests through the tape server process, $ZSVR. If you do not specify this entry, SYSGENR assumes that labeled-tape processing is disabled. TAPE_LABEL_PROCESSING ENABLED; For more information about the ALLPROCESSORS paragraph and labeled-tape processing considerations for SYSGENR, see the System Generation Manual for D4x Releases. Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem for NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers This subsection describes how to configure the modular tape subsystem if you plan to connect a tape drive to a PMF CRU, IOMF CRU, or a ServerNet device adapter. Topic Page The Group, Module, and Slot Hierarchy 2-19 Identifying CRUs 2-19 Completing the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU Configuration Form 2-20 Completing the 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form 2-23 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using SCF 2-25 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 18 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem The Group, Module, and Slot Hierarchy The Group, Module, and Slot Hierarchy Components in a NonStop Himalaya S-series server are organized according to a group, module, and slot hierarchy, as follows. Group A group consists of all objects accessible to a pair of service processors (SPs) in a system enclosure. In a NonStop Himalaya S-series server, a group is contained in exactly one enclosure and consists of a single module. Module A module is a set of components sharing a common hardware interconnection, such as a backplane. A module is a subset of a group, and it is usually contained in a system enclosure. A module contains one or more slots. In a NonStop Himalaya S-series server, there is exactly one module in a group. Slot A slot is a labeled physical space in an enclosure into which a CRU or field-replaceable unit (FRU) can be installed. FRUs are replaced by trained service providers only. Identifying CRUs CRUs in NonStop Himalaya S-series servers are identified by their physical location. There are no subchannel addresses as there were in previous systems. To locate any CRU, you need to know the following: group number The group number identifies all objects connected through the service processors (SPs) located on the processor multifunction (PMF) CRUs. For NonStop Himalaya S-series servers, this includes everything in a system enclosure. module number For NonStop Himalaya S-series servers, there is only one module in a group, so the module number is always “01.” slot number The slot number identifies a position within a module. The slot number is indicated by a label beneath the slot. For example, the Subsystem Control Facility (SCF) storage subsystem might display the location of a PMF CRU as: PMF.GRP-1.MOD-1.SLOT-50 Refer to Figure 1-7 on page 1-14 or Figure 1-8 on page 1-15 for the locations of the group ID and module ID labels on NonStop Himalaya S-series processor or I/O enclosures. For more information on system organization, group numbering, or labeling in a NonStop Himalaya S-series server, refer to the Himalaya S-Series Planning and Configuration Guide. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 19 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Completing the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU Configuration Form Completing the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU Configuration Form If you plan to connect a tape drive CRU to a PMF CRU or IOMF CRU, you document the configuration using a PMF CRU Configuration Form, PMF 2 CRU Configuration Form, IOMF CRU Configuration Form, or IOMF 2 CRU Configuration Form. This form documents configurable entities associated with the connectors on the CRU. It also provides information about the tape drive to be connected to the CRU. Figure 2-3 shows an example of a completed PMF CRU Configuration Form. Figure 2-4 on page 2-22 shows an example of a completed IOMF CRU Configuration Form. For blank configuration forms, refer to the Himalaya S-Series Planning and Configuration Guide. To complete the SCSI Port information block on the form: • • • Enter the product number of the tape drive in the Product Number field. Allowable product numbers are 5190 and 5194. Enter the Subsystem Control Facility (SCF) name of the tape drive in the SCF Name field, for example, $TAPE0. Enter the product number of the SCSI cable you will use with this tape drive in the SCSI Cable field. You must use one of the SCSI cables listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. For instructions on completing the rest of the configuration form, refer to the Himalaya S-Series Planning and Configuration Guide. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 20 Completing the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU Configuration Form Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 2-3. Example of a Completed PMF CRU Configuration Form System Name \Case1 Date 07 / 21 / 96 PMF CRU Configuration Form Shaded areas indicate nonconfigurable components Group 01 Module 01 Slot 55 SCSI Port Product Number: 5175 SCF Name: $TAPE0 POWER ON SCSI Cable: PN 131369 SCSI SERIAL CONSOLE ETHERNET Ethernet Port IP Address: Initially 192.231.36.11 Get new address from LAN department MODEM AC Power or DC Power AUX POWER-ON CABLE Adapter Name: $ZZLAN.MIOE 1 SAC Name: $ZZLAN.MIOE1.0 SAC Access List: 1,0 PIF Name: $ZZLAN.MIOE1.0.A LIF Name: $ZZLAN.LANY VST304.vsd VST044.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 21 Completing the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU Configuration Form Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 2-4. Example of a Completed IOMF CRU Configuration Form System Name IOMF CRU Configuration Form Date Shaded areas indicate nonconfigurable components Group 11 Module 01 \Case 1 07 / Slot 21 / 96 50 ServerNet Connection 126027 ServerNet Cable: ServerNet Connector: Group 01 5 SCSI Module Port 01 Slot 51 SCSI Port Product Number: 5194 SCF Name: $TAPE03 SCSI Cable: 518-025W POWER ON SERVERNET SCSI Ethernet Port IP Address: Port is Not Available for Use. SERIAL CONSOLE ETHERNET Adapter Name: MODEM AUX SAC Name: AC Power POWER-ON CABLE SAC Access List: PIF Name: LIF Name: VST307.vsd VST024.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 22 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Completing the 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form Completing the 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form If you plan to connect a tape drive CRU to a 6760 ServerNet device adapter, you document the configuration using a 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form. This form documents configurable entities associated with the connectors on a 6760 adapter. It also provides information about the tape drive to be connected. Figure 2-5 shows an example of a completed 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form. For a blank version of this configuration form, refer to the 6760 ServerNet/DA Manual. To complete a SAC information block on the form for each SAC you plan to install in the 6760 adapter: • Enter the SAC name in (group, module, slot) form, for example: SNDA.Sac-1.Grp-2.Mod-1.Slot-53 • • Enter the SAC number. Enter the Cable ID tag, as found on the cable. You do not need to configure a 6760 adapter using SCF. When you install a 6760 adapter in an appropriate slot, it is automatically added to the system configuration database. The name of the adapter is derived by combining the name of the storage subsystem manager process ($ZZSTO), an indication of the adapter type (SNDA), and the physical location of the adapter. For example, a 6760 adapter located in group 02, module 1, slot 53 would have the name: $ZZSTO.#SNDA.GRP-2.MOD-1.SLOT-53 You can use this name in SCF STATUS and INFO commands. For instructions on completing the rest of the 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form, refer to the 6760 ServerNet/DA Manual. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 23 Completing the 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 2-5. Example of a Completed 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form Date \SAMPLE System Name 02/53 Physical Location of Enclosure Room 1307 Enclosure/Slot Number 3 / 12 / 00 6760 Adapter: There are 1, 2, 3, or 4 SACs associated with this adapter. (circle one) SACName SNDA.Sac-1.Grp-2.Mod1.Slot-53 SAC Name SNDA.Sac-2.Grp-2.Mod1.Slot-53 SAC Number 1 SAC Number 2 Enclosure/Slot 02/53 Enclosure/Slot 02/53 Cable ID Tag G02S53SAC1DMA1 Cable ID Tag G02S53SAC2DMB2 Comments Comments SAC Name SAC Name SAC Number SAC Number Enclosure/Slot Enclosure/Slot Cable ID Tag Cable ID Tag NOT CONFIGURED Comments A1 Tape Module ID____ Comments Room 1307 Location of Module______________ B2 Tape Module ID____ Room 1307 Location of Module______________ Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 4 Unit 5 Logical Device Name: Disk Module ID____ TAPE1 ______________ $ Location of Module Logical Device Name: $ TAPE0 Logical Device Name: Logical Device Name: $ $ Disk Module ID____ NOT CONFIGURED Location of Module ______________ Logical Device Name: Logical Device Name: $ $ Logical Device Name: $ Logical Device Name: Unit 4 Unit 5 $ Unit 4 Unit 5 VST0 21.vsd VST028.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 24 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using SCF Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using SCF On NonStop Himalaya S-series servers, you use the Subsystem Control Facility (SCF) to configure tape drives. SCF allows you to add, change the attributes of, and delete a tape drive. You can run SCF from any terminal on the system after you are logged on. Using SCF, you can: • • • • • Obtain configuration information about a tape drive Restore access to a tape drive Stop access to a tape drive if there is no activity List tape drive status Switch the primary processor for a tape drive This subsection provides examples of configuring cartridge tape drives using SCF. The examples show how to define and add a tape drive to the system configuration, alter the attributes of a tape drive, and remove a tape drive from the system configuration. For a complete description of how to configure and manage tape drives using SCF, see the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. For information about how you use SCF to configure, control, and inquire about other supported subsystems for NonStop Himalaya S-series servers, see the SCF Reference Manual for G-Series Releases. Example 1: Defining and Adding a Tape Drive You use the SCF ADD TAPE command to define and add a 5190 or 5194 tape drive to your system configuration. Before you issue the ADD TAPE command, check that the tape drive is installed properly (see Section 3, Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem or to the Himalaya S-Series Hardware Installation Guide). Verify the group enclosure, module, and slot that the tape drive is connected to (see Identifying CRUs on page 2-19). The following example adds tape drive $TAPE0 to the system configuration: ->ADD TAPE $TAPE0, SENDTO STORAGE, LOCATION (2,1,55),& ->&PRIMARYCPU 0, BACKUPCPU 1 The following are notes about this example: • • • The LOCATION attribute specifies the location (group,module,slot) of the CRU to which the tape drive is attached. The PRIMARYCPU attribute specifies the processor in which the primary tape process should execute. The BACKUPCPU attribute specifies the processor in which the tape process starts its backup process. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 25 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using SCF Issue the SCF INFO TAPE command after the ADD TAPE command is finished to verify that the tape drive has been properly configured. For example: ->INFO TAPE $TAPE0, DETAIL STORAGE - Detailed Info TAPE configuration \TEST.$TAPE0 Adapter Name..........................$ZZSTO.#PMF.GRP-2.MOD-1.SLOT-55 *Adapter Location (Group,Module,Slot). (2,1,55) *BackupCpu............................ 1 *Compression.......................... ON *Density.............................. 38000 *DeviceID............................. 5 *HighPin.............................. ON *NumOpeners........................... 2 *MaxOpens............................. 4 *PrimaryCpu........................... 0 *Program.............................. $SYSTEM.SYS00.OTPPROCP *RecSize.............................. 8192 SAC Name............................. $ZZSTO.#PMF.GRP-2.MOD-1.SLOT-55 *StartState........................... STARTED For more information on the ADD and INFO commands, see the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. Example 2: Changing the Values of Tape Drive Attributes You use the SCF ALTER TAPE command to change the attribute values for a tape drive attached to your system. The ALTER command changes only the attributes that you specify in the command. Other attributes remain as they were before you issued the command. • The following example of the ALTER command changes the value of the compression attribute for the 5190 tape drive $TAPE0 to OFF and then issues the SCF INFO command to make sure that the change has taken place: ->ALTER TAPE $TAPE0, COMPRESSION OFF ->INFO TAPE $TAPE0 STORAGE - Info TAPE configuration \TEST.$TAPE0 *Density *MaxOpen *RecSize *Compression *Adapter Location 38000 4 8192 OFF 2,1,55 *DeviceID 5 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 26 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem • Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using SCF The following example changes tape drive $TAPE1 so that its tape process runs only at a low PIN and then checks to make sure that the change has taken place: ->ALTER TAPE $TAPE1, HIGHPIN OFF ->INFO TAPE $TAPE1, DETAIL STORAGE - Detailed Info TAPE configuration \TEST.$TAPE1 Adapter Name..........................$ZZSTO.#PMF.GRP-2.MOD-1.SLOT-55 *Adapter Location (Group,Module,Slot). (2,1,55) *BackupCpu............................ 1 *Compression.......................... ON *Density.............................. 38000 *DeviceID............................. 5 *HighPin.............................. OFF *NumOpeners........................... 2 *MaxOpens............................. 4 *PrimaryCpu........................... 0 *Program.............................. $SYSTEM.SYS00.OTPPROCP *RecSize.............................. 8192 SAC Name............................. $ZZSTO.# *StartState........................... STARTED • The following example specifies that a maximum of 32 concurrent file opens are allowed for the tape drive $TAPE1: ->ALTER TAPE $TAPE1, NUMOPENERS 32 For more information on the ALTER and INFO commands, see the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. Example 3: Deleting a Tape Drive From the System You use the SCF STOP TAPE and DELETE TAPE commands to remove a tape drive from the system configuration database. Before issuing the SCF STOP command, use the SCF STATUS command to verify that the tape drive is in the STOPPED state. For example: ->STATUS TAPE $TAPE0 STORAGE - Status TAPE \TEST.$TAPE0 LDev State Primary Backup PID PID 20 STOPPED 0,30 1,30 DeviceStatus NOT READY If the STATUS command shows that the tape drive is not in the STOPPED state, use the SCF STOP command to place the tape drive in the STOPPED state. For example: ->STOP TAPE $TAPE0 The following example removes tape drive $TAPE0 from the system configuration: ->DELETE TAPE $TAPE0 Use the INFO command to verify that the tape drive has been removed from the system: ->INFO $TAPE* 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 27 Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using SCF For more information on the STATUS, DELETE, and INFO commands, see the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 2- 28 3 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem This section tells you how to plan for and install the modular tape subsystem. This section covers the following topics: Topic Page Service Classes of Components 3-1 Installation Overview (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-2 Installation Overview (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 3-3 Installation Planning 3-4 Unpacking the Modular Storage System 3-16 Installing a Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-19 Installing a Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 3-22 Connecting the Modular Tape Subsystem 3-22 Loading the Operating System Image (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-39 Bringing the Tape Drives Online After Installation 3-39 Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-45 Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 3-46 Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-48 Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 3-52 Unless stated otherwise, each topic in this section applies to both NonStop Himalaya K-series servers and NonStop Himalaya S-series servers. Service Classes of Components The system hardware components that you can replace are called customerreplaceable units (CRUs). The 5190/5194 modular tape subsystem is a Class-2 CRU. A Class-2 CRU might cause a partial or total system outage if the documented replacement procedure is not followed correctly. Customers replacing a Class-2 CRU should have either three or more months of experience with replacing NonStop Himalaya S-series CRUs, or equivalent training. Also, customers must: • • Be able to use the tools needed for the replacement procedure Protect components from electrostatic discharge (ESD) 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3 -1 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Installation Overview (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) The other major components documented in this manual, the 6760 adapter and the plug-in cards (PICs) for this adapter, are Class-3 CRUs. Replacement by a service provider trained by Compaq is recommended. The Himalaya S-Series Hardware Support Guide provides detailed replacement procedures for CRUs, as well as more information about classification of components into CRUs and FRUs and service classes of CRUs. Installation Overview (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Table 3-1 lists the tasks involved in installing a modular tape subsystem to an MFC or a 3216 tape controller on a NonStop Himalaya K-series server. Table 3-1. NonStop Himalaya K-Series Tape Subsystem Installation Tasks (page 1 of 2) Task Description Topic 1. Plan for the installation. Installation Planning 2. Unpack the modular storage system. Unpacking the Modular Storage System 3-16 3. Perform one of the following tasks: Install the MFC logic board and RS-232/SCSI BIC in the system. Installing the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-19 Install the 3216 logic board and BIC in the system. Installing the 3216 Tape Controller (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-20 • • 4. Page 3-4 Perform one of the following tasks: • Use COUP to add the modular tape subsystem to your system configuration. Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP Modify the CONFTEXT configuration file in the system and run the DSM/SCM program to create a new operating system image (OSIMAGE). Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File 2-13 5. Connect the tape drive to the system. Connecting the Modular Tape Subsystem 3-22 6. Load the new operating system image. Loading the Operating System Image (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-39 7. Bring the tape drive online. Bringing the Tape Drives Online After Installation 3-39 • 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3 -2 2-7 Installation Overview (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Table 3-1. NonStop Himalaya K-Series Tape Subsystem Installation Tasks (page 2 of 2) Task Description Topic 8. Verify or set the device ID for the tape drive CRU. Checking and Setting the Device ID 3-41 9. Insert a new cleaning cartridge. Installing the Cleaning Cartridge in the ACL 3-44 Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 3-45 10. Verify that the modular tape subsystem is ready for use. Page Before beginning the installation process, be sure to review Section 1, Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem. Installation Overview (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) Table 3-2 lists the tasks involved in installing a modular tape subsystem. Table 3-2. NonStop Himalaya S-Series Tape Subsystem Installation Tasks Task Description Topic Page 1. Plan for the installation. Installation Planning 2. Unpack the modular storage system. Unpacking the Modular Storage System 3-16 3. Connect the tape drive to the system. Connecting the Modular Tape Subsystem 3-22 4. Use SCF to add the modular tape subsystem to your configuration. Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using SCF 2-25 5. Bring the tape drive online. Bringing the Tape Drives Online After Installation 3-39 6. Verify or set the device ID for the tape drive CRU. Checking and Setting the Device ID 3-41 7. Insert a new cleaning cartridge. Installing the Cleaning Cartridge in the ACL 3-44 8. Verify that the modular tape subsystem is ready for use. Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 3-46 3-4 Before beginning the installation process, be sure to review Section 1, Introduction to the Modular Tape Subsystem. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3 -3 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Installation Planning Installation Planning Whether you are connecting the modular tape subsystem to an already installed system or to a new system, you need to review the following information before beginning installation. Topic Page Limitations (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 3-4 Device IDs 3-4 Service Clearance and Dimensions 3-7 Environmental Requirements 3-9 Fiber-Optic Cable Installation 3-9 AC Power Requirements 3-9 Power Cords 3-10 Stack Height 3-10 Migrating a Tape Drive to a NonStop Himalaya S-Series Server 3-12 Tape Drive Configurations 3-12 Only a trained service provider can install and attach tape drives to K10000, K1000SE, K20000, and K2000SE servers that have MC-32 I/O cabinets. Limitations (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) When planning the installation of a modular tape subsystem, be aware of the following: • • • • Avoid daisy-chaining tape drives on NonStop Himalaya S-series servers, because tape performance is limited by competing server tasks like disk I/O activity. You can dump processor memory to tape only if the tape drive is connected to a PMF CRU. You cannot dump memory to tape if the tape drive is connected to a 6760 ServerNet device adapter. If you are connecting the modular tape subsystem to a 6760 ServerNet device adapter, refer to the 6760 ServerNet/DA Manual for other restrictions. Device IDs A single tape drive module can hold up to two tape drive CRUs. Each drive CRU must have a unique device ID to identify the drive to the controller. Drive CRUs that are not part of a system order arrive from the factory with a device ID of 5, but it is a good idea to check the device ID of each drive CRU whenever you install, replace, or upgrade drive CRUs. The device ID is set by the tape drive CRU firmware. For instructions on how to display the device ID on the drive or ACL front panel, see Checking and Setting the Device ID on page 3-41. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3 -4 Device IDs Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Note the following guidelines for each controller or adapter type: • • For NonStop Himalaya K-series servers: ° The MFC supports one drive CRU for each controller. This drive CRU must have a device ID of 5. ° The 3216 tape controller supports up to two drive CRUs. If one drive CRU is attached to the 3216 controller, it must have a device ID of 5. If two drive CRUs are attached to the same 3216 controller and linked by a daisy-chain cable, the device IDs must be 4 and 5. For NonStop Himalaya S-series servers: ° The ServerNet addressable controller (SAC), which is part of the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU, supports one drive CRU. This drive CRU must have a device ID of 5. ° The 6760 ServerNet device adapter, connected by either a SCSI cable (S-PIC) or a fiber-optic cable (F-PIC), can support one tape drive for each PIC. On an S-PIC, the device ID can be 0 through 5. On an F-PIC, the device ID can be 4 or 5. On either, the default is 5. See Table 3-3 for a summary of device IDs based on the controller or adapter type. Table 3-3. Drive CRU Device IDs for Each Controller or Adapter Controller or Adapter Server Number of Drive CRUs Supported Drive CRU Device IDs MFC NonStop Himalaya K-series server 1 5 3216 NonStop Himalaya K-series server 1 or 2* 5 and 4 SCSI SAC NonStop Himalaya S-series server 1 5 6760 adapter with 6761 F-PIC NonStop Himalaya S-series server 4 (1 per PIC) 5 or 4 6760 adapter with 6762 S-PIC NonStop Himalaya S-series server 4 (1 per PIC) 0 through 5 * Two drive CRUs can be supported using daisy-chaining. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3 -5 Device IDs Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Tape Drive CRU Placement Tape drive CRUs are installed in the module and assigned device IDs according to the following rules: • • • In modules containing one tape drive CRU (with or without an ACL), the drive is placed on the left as you face the module. In modules containing two tape drive CRUs where only one drive CRU has an ACL, the ACL is placed on the left as you face the module. When two tape drive CRUs in the same module are attached to the same 3216 tape controller in a NonStop Himalaya K-series server, the drive CRU on the left is device ID 5 and the drive CRU on the right is device ID 4. Figure 3-1 shows the tape drive CRU placement and device IDs for tape drive modules arriving from the factory that connect to one 3216 controller. If you replace one of two drive CRUs attached to a 3216 controller, you must check the device ID and change it, if necessary, so that the drive CRUs do not have the same device ID. See Checking and Setting the Device ID on page 3-41. Figure 3-1. Drive Placement and Device IDs for Tape Drive CRUs Attached to a 3216 Controller One Drive CRU, No ACL Device ID 5 Two Drive CRUs, No ACLs Device ID 5 Device ID 4 One Drive CRU, One ACL Device ID 5 Two Drive CRUs, One ACL Device ID 5 Device ID 4 Two Drive CRUs, Two ACLs Device ID 5 Device ID 4 VST039.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3 -6 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Service Clearance and Dimensions Service Clearance and Dimensions Refer to Figure 3-2 and note the following positioning and size information before beginning the installation: • • • • • • • The modular storage system requires 70 by 90 centimeters (27 inches by 35 inches) of floor space. You must allow a clearance of 60 to 90 centimeters (23 to 35 inches) at the front and 90 centimeters (35 inches) at the rear of the modular storage system for adequate ventilation and servicing. The tape drives can be removed and serviced only from the rear. A tape drive module with a 7150 pedestal has the following dimensions: ° ° ° Height: 79 centimeters (31 inches) Width: 70 centimeters (27 inches) Depth: 90 centimeters (35 inches) A tape drive module without a pedestal or shelf has the following dimensions: ° ° ° Height: 35 centimeters (14 inches) Width: 60 centimeters (23 inches) Depth: 90 centimeters (35 inches) A 7150 pedestal has the following dimensions: ° ° ° Height: 43 centimeters (17 inches) Width: 70 centimeters (27 inches) Depth: 90 centimeters (35 inches) The AC power cord measures 4.5 meters (15 feet). The maximum cable length for attaching a tape drive to each controller or adapter type is given in Table 1-5 on page 1-13. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3 -7 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Service Clearance and Dimensions Figure 3-2. Service Clearances for the Modular Storage System Rear 90 cm (35 inches) 60-90 cm (23-35 inches) Front VST030.vsd Table 3-4 shows weights for the components of the modular storage system. Table 3-4. Modular Storage System Component Weights Component Weight (lb) Weight (kg) Module (no drive CRUs) 56 25.5 Module fully loaded (2 drive CRUs with ACLs) 206 93.6 One-high stack (fully loaded) with pedestal 332 150.9 Two-high stack (fully loaded) with pedestal 577 262.3 Three-high stack (fully loaded) with pedestal 822 373.6 5190 or 5194 tape drive CRU 50 22.7 5190 or 5194 tape drive CRU with ACL 75 34.1 ACL magazine (without cartridges) 2.5 1.1 BEB enclosure and board 2 0.9 Pedestal (with riser) 87 39.5 Shelf (riser) 39 17.7 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3 -8 Environmental Requirements Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Environmental Requirements Table 3-5 lists environmental requirements for the tape drive module. Table 3-5. Environmental Requirements for the Tape Drive Module Factor Operating* Nonoperating In Transit Temperature 15 to 32 °C (60 to 90 °F) -29 to 55 °C (-20 to 131 °F) -40 to 66 °C (-40 to 150 °F) Temp. gradient (maximum) 11 °C (20 °F)/h 11 °C (20 °F)/h 11 °C (20 °F)/h Relative humidity (noncondensing) 20 to 80% 10 to 95% 10 to 95% Shock (11 ms duration) 3G 10 G 10 G Audible noise 55 dB n/a n/a Heat output (module with two drives and two ACLs) 1700 Btu/h n/a n/a * Operating temperature and humidity are limited by the media specification. Fiber-Optic Cable Installation You use the same kind of fiber-optic cable to attach a tape drive CRU to a 3216 controller or a 6761 fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC) on a 6760 adapter. Part numbers for the different cable lengths are listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. The procedures in this section assume that the fiber-optic cable has been installed by a certified cable installer. Within the U.S., installation support can be obtained through your service provider. Services are available for virtually every aspect of the installation process, including site survey, construction and safety permits, cable selection, installation, terminations, and testing. For an installation performed by personnel not employed by Compaq, your service provider can certify that the minimum requirements are met for proper system operation. To take advantage of these services, contact your service provider. AC Power Requirements Each 5190 and 5194 tape drive CRU contains an auto-ranging power supply that accepts input current in two voltage ranges: 85–132 volts AC (3.0 amperes) and 170–264 volts AC (1.5 amperes). No switch is required to change between ranges or between 50 and 60 hertz. Table 3-6 shows the tape drive CRU AC power requirements. Table 3-6. AC Power Requirements for the Tape Drive CRU Power Volts Amperes USA 60 Hz 110/120 3.0 Europe 50 Hz 220 1.5 Orient 50 Hz 200 1.5 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3 -9 Power Cords Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem If the power supply fails, it is not available as a subassembly. The tape drive CRU must be replaced. Power Cords Each tape drive CRU comes with a 4.5-meter (15-foot) AC power cord (two cords maximum for each module). One end of the power cord plugs into the socket near the AC power switch at the rear of the tape drive CRU. The other end of the power cord is routed through the riser extrusion channel to the floor and then to the power source. See Connecting and Routing the AC Power Cords on page 3-26. Table 3-7 shows the current and voltage ratings of AC power cords available for the tape drive CRU. Table 3-7. AC Power Cord Current and Voltage Ratings Current (Amps) Voltage (Volts) North America (locking plug) 10 125 NEMA 5-15P North America (locking receptacle) 10 125 NEMA 5-15R Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Netherlands, Norway, Sweden 10 250 CEE 7/7 Australia, New Zealand 10 250 AS 3112 United Kingdom 10 250 BS-1363 Switzerland 10 250 SEV 1011.1959 Italy 10 250 CEI 23-16/VII Denmark 10 250 Afsnit 107 Country/Region Plug Stack Height Peripheral devices installed in a modular storage system are subject to height restrictions to ensure safe installation and operation. Figure 3-3 shows a full stack consisting of three modules on a riser. Level A is for disk drives and levels B, C, and D are for tape drives. Level A doesn’t have any tape drives installed because it is very inconvenient to operate a tape unit at that height. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 10 Stack Height Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 3-3. Maximum Stack Height for the Modular Storage System Level D 150 cm (59 inches) Level C Level B 115 cm (45 inches) Level A VST010.vsd Any stack combination that includes modular tape devices is limited to a maximum height of 150 centimeters (59 inches) from the floor to the top surface of the stack. This height can provide three tape modules (up to 6 tape drives) with a disk module in level A. For shipping purposes, the maximum stack height without shipping materials is 115 centimeters (45 inches) from the floor to the top surface. This height can provide two tape modules (up to 4 tape drives) with a disk module in level A. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 11 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Migrating a Tape Drive to a NonStop Himalaya S-Series Server Migrating a Tape Drive to a NonStop Himalaya S-Series Server If you wish to migrate a 5190 or 5194 tape drive to a NonStop Himalaya S-series server, ask your service provider to provide version level information for your tape drive hardware. Tape Drive Configurations The installation procedure for a modular tape subsystem depends on the controller or adapter, cable type, and the number of tape drives (one or two) in each tape drive module. MFC (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) An MFC supports one tape drive (see Figure 3-4). For a module containing two drives, you must attach the drives to separate MFCs. The MFC uses SCSI cable for attachment and does not require a back-end board (BEB). Figure 3-4. MFC Drive Configuration SCSI Terminator Copper Cable (3.1 m or 7.7 m) MFC Logic Board Tape Drive Device ID 5 ACL Drive CRU RS-232/SCSI BIC VST011.vsd 3216 Controller (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) A 3216 controller can support one tape drive (see Figure 3-5) or two tape drives (see Figure 3-6). In the two-drive configuration, a daisy-chained SCSI cable passes commands and information between the drives. The daisy-chain cable and the SCSI terminator required to terminate the unused receptacle are installed at the factory. The 3216 controller attaches to the drive CRU using fiber-optic cable and requires a back-end board (BEB) to translate fiber-optic signals into SCSI data. You must install the BEB by plugging it into the SCSI port and securing the wing nut (see Installing the BEB (Fiber-Optic Cables Only) on page 3-25). With a daisy-chain cable, one BEB can support two drives. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 12 Tape Drive Configurations Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 3-5. 3216 Controller One-Drive Configuration SCSI Terminator BEB Fiber-Optic Cable (10 m to 2 km) 3216 Logic Board Tape Drive Device ID 5 ACL Drive CRU 3216 BIC VST041.vsd Figure 3-6. 3216 Controller Two-Drive Configuration DaisyChain Cable Fiber-Optic Cable (10 m to 2 km) Tape Drive Device ID 4 SCSI Terminator ACL Drive CRU Tape Drive 3216 Logic Board 3216 BIC BEB Device ID 5 ACL Drive CRU VST038.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 13 Tape Drive Configurations Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem PMF CRU or IOMF CRU (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) A SCSI SAC within a PMF CRU or IOMF CRU supports one tape drive CRU (see Figure 3-7). For a module containing two drives, you must attach the tape drives to separate CRUs. The PMF CRU or IOMF CRU uses SCSI cable for attachment to the tape drive CRU. Figure 3-7. PMF CRU or IOMF CRU Drive Configuration SCSI Port SCSI Terminator Copper SCSI Cable (3.1 m to 23 m) Tape Drive Device ID 5 ACL Drive CRU Processor Multifunction (PMF) CRU VST045.vsd 6760 Adapter With 6761 F-PIC (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) A SAC on a 6761 F-PIC within a 6760 device adapter can support one tape drive CRU. Fiber-optic cable attaches the F-PIC to the drive CRU (see Figure 3-8). The 6761 F-PIC requires a back-end board (BEB) to translate fiber-optic signals into SCSI data. You must install the BEB by plugging it into the SCSI port and securing the wing nut (see Installing the BEB (Fiber-Optic Cables Only) on page 3-25). 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 14 Tape Drive Configurations Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 3-8. 6761 ServerNet/DA F-PIC With Two Drives Configured SCSI Terminator Tape Drive Drive CRU BEB ACL SCSI Terminator Tape Drive 6760 Adapter Board Fiber-Optic Cable (1 m to 2 km) Drive CRU BEB ACL VST026.vsd 6760 Adapter With 6762 S-PIC (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) A SAC on a 6762 S-PIC within a 6760 adapter can support one tape drive CRU. The S-PIC uses a SCSI cable for attachment to the tape drive CRU (see Figure 3-9). Figure 3-9. 6762 ServerNet/DA S-PIC With Two Drives Configured SCSI Terminator Copper Cable (3.1 m or 23 m) Tape Drive Device ID 5 SCSI Terminator 6760 Adapter Board Copper Cable (3.1 m or 23 m) Drive CRU ACL Tape Drive Device ID 5 Drive CRU ACL VST037.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 15 Unpacking the Modular Storage System Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Unpacking the Modular Storage System The tape drives arrive from the factory already installed in a modular storage system stack. The stack can consist of tape modules, disk modules, or both. The tape drives and modular storage system are shipped in two customer-installable configurations: one module on a pedestal or two modules on a pedestal. Tape drives, ACLs, and power supplies come preinstalled in their respective customer-replaceable units (CRUs). A mixed stack of tape drives and disk drives must be installed by a trained service provider. WARNING. To avoid strain or injury, always use two people to unload and move the modular storage system. A two-high stack of fully loaded tape drive modules can weigh nearly 600 pounds (270 kilograms). You need the following tools to unpack the modular storage system: • • Band cutters 24-mm (15/16-inch) or adjustable, open-ended wrench The following table describes the packaging for the components that the tape drives will connect to. Tape drive will connect to Server Packaging MFC NonStop Himalaya K-series The MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC and SCSI cable come in separate boxes. 3216 controller NonStop Himalaya K-series The 3216 logic board, 3216 BIC, fiber-optic cable, and BEB enclosure come in a separate box. PMF CRU or IOMF CRU NonStop Himalaya S-series The SCSI cable comes in a separate box (the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU is preinstalled in the system enclosure). 6760 adapter NonStop Himalaya S-series Either fiber-optic (F-PIC) or SCSI (S-PIC) cable comes in a separate box For tape drive CRUs that include an ACL, the cartridge magazine is packaged separately. Be sure to put the cartridge magazine in the magazine compartment prior to using the tape drive. Each tape drive is shipped with a user’s kit containing the following items: • • • • 5190/5194 Read Me First card Blank data cartridge Cleaning cartridge 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 16 Unpacking the Modular Storage System Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem To unpack the modular storage system, use the following procedure. Refer to Figure 3-10 and to the instructions on the outside of the shipping crate. 1. Cut the straps holding the ramp to the carton, and remove the ramp. 2. While standing at the side of the carton, pull the carton up over the top of the modules. 3. Remove the styrofoam corner protectors and the antistatic bag covering the modules. 4. Flip open the twist-lock handles on both sides of the end piece at the base of the modules, and turn the twist-lock handles counterclockwise to loosen the end piece. 5. Remove the U-bolts from under the end piece and save them for use in the next step. Separate the end piece from the base of the pallet, and set it aside. Figure 3-10. Unpacking and Removing the Modular Storage System From the Shipping Pallet 2 3 1 4 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 17 VST009.vsd Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Unpacking the Modular Storage System 6. Push the tall end of the ramp against the pallet to form an incline. Insert the U-bolts into the predrilled holes to secure the ramp to the pallet. 7. With one person on each side of the modular storage system, slowly guide it off the pallet and down the ramp. The modular storage system pedestal is on casters, allowing you to move it easily down the ramp and into position. a. Inspect for scratches, rust, or shipping damage. Record any damage on the waybill. Report any damaged equipment to Compaq Computer Corporation. Failure to report damaged equipment immediately can result in a loss of claim. b. Make sure you have all the items listed on the packing slip that comes with the equipment. 8. Move the modular storage system into place. Note the service clearance information under Service Clearance and Dimensions on page 3-7. 9. Lower the cabinet legs on the pedestal. The legs are located next to each caster. a. Turn the leg counterclockwise with your fingers until it touches the floor. b. Using a 24-mm (15/16-inch) or adjustable, open-ended wrench, turn the nut to secure the pad firmly on the floor. 10. Remove the foam packing piece from all tape drive CRUs that have an automatic cartridge loader (ACL). The ACL is shipped with a disk-shaped foam insert that supports the autoloader and prevents vibration during shipment. This piece must be removed before you power up the tape drive CRU. 11. Now install the modular tape subsystem and connect it to the server. (See Installing a Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers), on page 3-19. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 18 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Installing a Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Installing a Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) This subsection describes the steps necessary to install the modular tape subsystem on a NonStop Himalaya K-series server. Installing the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) If you plan to attach a tape drive to an MFC, you must replace the standard MFC RS-232 BIC (with four connectors) with an RS-232/SCSI BIC (with five connectors). The RS-232/SCSI BIC has an extra connector for an open-reel or cartridge tape drive (see Figure 1-5 on page 1-11). Part numbers for MFC BICs are listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers. Removing an MFC RS-232 BIC Use the following procedure to remove an MFC RS-232 BIC: 1. Shut down the application software that uses the MFC. 2. Shut down the system software that uses the MFC. Be sure to: • • • Shut down any TACL processes for terminals attached to the MFC Establish new primary paths for the disk drives attached to the MFC Shut down the paths to the internal tape drive and communications lines For examples, see the support guide for your system. 3. Obtain the appropriate I/O slot number in the system or I/O cabinet from the completed BIC diagram for the MFC. You can also get this information from the completed cabinet check list for that cabinet or from the system manager. 4. At the back of the cabinet, remove the cabinet cover and locate the BIC you are to remove. BICs are in slots 90 through 99 in system cabinets and slots 90E through 99E in I/O cabinets. 5. If cables are connected to the BIC, attach a label to each cable. On the label, write the name of the BIC connector to which the cable is connected (such as J1 or J4). Then disconnect the cables. 6. Loosen the thumbscrews that secure the BIC to the card cage. If a thumbscrew does not move with finger pressure, you can use a slotted screwdriver to remove the BIC from the cabinet. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 19 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Installing the 3216 Tape Controller (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Installing an MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Use the following procedure to install an MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC: 1. Insert the BIC in the slot, sliding the board along the slot rails until the rear-edge connector makes contact with the backplane connector. 2. Make sure the BIC is seated firmly. If the system is powered on, the green indicator light on the BIC will be lit and the red indicator light on the BIC will be unlit. Notify your service provider if the red indicator is lit. 3. Tighten the two thumbscrews to secure the BIC. 4. Reconnect the cables that were connected to the original BIC. Check the label on each cable to make sure that you reconnect each cable to the correct connector (J1, J2, and so on). 5. Restore any paths to the disk devices as they were before you started the replacement procedure. Then restore the paths to the internal cartridge tape drive, communications lines, and terminals. 6. Restart the system software, including any TACL processes that were stopped. 7. Restart the application software. 8. Perform one of the following tasks: • • Use COUP to add the modular tape subsystem to your system configuration. See Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP on page 2-7. Modify the CONFTEXT configuration file in the system and run the Distributed Systems Management/Software Configuration Manager (DSM/SCM) program to create a new operating system image (OSIMAGE). See Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File on page 2-13. For information on how to make connections between the BIC and a tape drive CRU, see Connecting the Modular Tape Subsystem on page 3-22. Installing the 3216 Tape Controller (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) The 3216 tape controller consists of two parts: the logic board and the BIC (see Figure 1-6 on page 1-12). The logic board is installed in the logic board section of the system cabinet or I/O cabinet, and the BIC is installed in the corresponding slot in the BIC section of the same cabinet. The following instructions apply to NonStop Himalaya K1000SE, K2000SE, K10000, and K20000 servers with MF-8 I/O cabinets and to NonStop Himalaya K2, K100, K200, K1000, and K2000 servers. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 20 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Installing the 3216 Tape Controller (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Installing a 3216 BIC Use the following procedure to install a 3216 BIC: 1. Obtain the appropriate I/O slot number in the system or I/O cabinet from the completed BIC diagram for the 3216 controller. You can also get this information from the completed cabinet check list for that cabinet. 2. Remove the protective cable cover from the rear of the cabinet. 3. Locate the BIC slot at the rear of the cabinet that corresponds to the assigned I/O slot. Remove the BIC filler panel from the slot by turning the retaining screws at the top and bottom of the panel counterclockwise until the panel is released. 4. Insert the BIC in the slot, sliding the board along the slot rails until the rear-edge connector makes contact with the backplane connector. 5. Press the front panel of the BIC to fully seat the board into the backplane. 6. Tighten the two retaining screws finger tight. 7. Remove the filler plug, if necessary, from the connector. 8. Do not place the protective cable cover on the rear of the cabinet at this time. Wait until the fiber-optic cables are connected and the power-on sequence has finished successfully. Installing a 3216 Logic Board Use the following procedure to install a 3216 logic board: 1. Obtain the appropriate I/O slot number in the system or I/O cabinet from the completed BIC diagram for the 3216 controller. You can also get this information from the completed cabinet check list for that cabinet. 2. Remove the logic board filler panel from the I/O slot by following these steps: a. Turn the captive thumbscrews on the two ejector latches counterclockwise until the thumbscrews release. b. Push upward on the top latch and downward on the bottom latch until the filler panel unseats. c. Carefully remove the filler panel from the slot. 3. To insert the logic board in the I/O slot, follow these steps: a. Insert the logic board into the slot, sliding the board along the slot rails until the rear-edge connector makes contact with the backplane connector. b. Check that the guide tabs on the top and bottom ejectors are properly aligned with the slots in the front panel before tightening the thumbscrews. c. Tighten the top and bottom thumbscrews to secure the ejector latches in place. The thumbscrews do not require more than a few turns to secure the latches. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 21 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Installing a Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) A clearance of up to 1/8 inch between the ejector and logic board is acceptable. 4. Perform one of the following tasks: • • Use COUP to add the modular tape subsystem to your system configuration. See Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using COUP on page 2-7. Modify the CONFTEXT configuration file and run the DSM/SCM program to create a new operating system image (OSIMAGE). See Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File on page 2-13. Installing a Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) Refer to the Himalaya S-Series Hardware Support Guide for information on installing a 6760 ServerNet adapter with either a 6761 F-PIC or 6762 S-PIC. Connecting the Modular Tape Subsystem This subsection describes how to attach cables between the modular tape subsystem and the server. Not all topics apply to all components, as indicated in Table 3-8. Table 3-8. Modular Tape System Connecting Tasks (page 1 of 2) Page MFC 3216 PMF/ IOMF CRU Opening and Removing the Rear Bezel Door 3-23 X X X Installing the BEB (Fiber-Optic Cables Only) 3-25 X X Connecting and Routing the AC Power Cords 3-26 X X Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the BEB 3-28 Connecting a SCSI Cable 3-30 X Connecting a NonStop Himalaya K-Series SCSI Cable to the Drive CRU 3-30 X Connecting a NonStop Himalaya S-Series SCSI Cable to the Drive CRU 3-32 Topic S-PIC/ F-PIC X Connect Cables to the Tape Drive Connecting a SCSI Cable to the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC X X X 3-34 X 3-34 X X 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 22 X X X Connect Cables to the Server Connecting Cables to NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers X Opening and Removing the Rear Bezel Door Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Table 3-8. Modular Tape System Connecting Tasks (page 2 of 2) PMF/ IOMF CRU S-PIC/ F-PIC 3-36 X X Connecting a SCSI Cable to the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU 3-36 X Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the F-PIC of a 6760 Adapter 3-38 X Connecting a SCSI Cable to the S-PIC of a 6760 Adapter 3-38 X Topic Page Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the 3216 BIC Connecting Cables to NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers MFC 3216 3-35 X Opening and Removing the Rear Bezel Door Figure 3-11 shows the rear view of two tape drive CRUs in a module. Figure 3-11. Rear View of Two Tape Drive CRUs in a Module Tape Drive Module AC Power Switch Power Supply Fan AC Power Receptacle Drive CRU Screw Hole for BEB Enclosure Drive CRU Locking Clip 50-Pin SCSI Ports Rear Bezel Door Cutout Rear Bezel Door Tape Drive CRU Pullout Handles (Caution: Do not lift CRU by this handle.) VST008.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 23 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Opening and Removing the Rear Bezel Door The rear bezel door on a tape drive module provides access to the ports on the rear of the tape drive CRUs. Before you can connect AC power cords or cables, you must remove the rear bezel door from the module. Two push/pull fasteners hold the top of the door closed. To open the rear bezel door, do the following. Caution. Do not set heavy objects on the rear bezel door. Doing so could bend or break the door. 1. Pull on the blue-green handle at the top. Hinges at the base of the module allow you to lower the door to a horizontal position. 2. The hinges feature spring-loaded plungers. Pull up on the plungers to release the hinges, and remove the rear bezel door from the module (see Figure 3-12). Figure 3-12. Hinges on the Rear Bezel Door Cutout for Cable Routing Hinge Plunger Plunger Hinge VST032.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 24 Installing the BEB (Fiber-Optic Cables Only) Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Installing the BEB (Fiber-Optic Cables Only) Figure 3-13 shows a back-end board (BEB) enclosure. You must install a BEB enclosure on the tape drive CRU if you want to attach the drive to a 3216 controller or a 6761 fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC) on a 6760 adapter. (SCSI-attached drives do not require a BEB.) The BEB translates fiber-optic signals from the 3216 controller or 6761 F-PIC into SCSI commands and information for the tape drive. When connecting to a 3216 controller, one BEB can serve two daisy-chained tape drives; the BEB attaches to the port on the rear of the drive CRU that is not terminated. Figure 3-13. Back-End Board (BEB) Enclosure Fiber-Optic Cable Socket With Key Power LED Captive Wing Nut Carrier Signal LED VST006.vsd Caution. The BEB contains static-sensitive components. Be sure to touch a grounded object before touching the BEB. Compaq recommends that you use an electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection kit to protect electronic and static-sensitive components such as the BEB from electrostatic discharge. For ESD guidelines, see the Himalaya S-Series Hardware Support Guide. To install the BEB, use the following procedure: 1. Make sure power is removed from the tape drive CRU. 2. Remove the filler plug, if necessary, from the fiber-optic cable socket on top of the BEB enclosure. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 25 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Connecting and Routing the AC Power Cords 3. Holding the BEB enclosure with two hands, align the captive wing nut and the 50-pin connector on the side of the BEB with the screw hole and the uncapped SCSI connector on the rear of the drive CRU. Plug the enclosure into the connector. 4. Push and tighten the wing nut to secure the BEB enclosure to the rear of the drive CRU. Connecting and Routing the AC Power Cords An AC power cord connects the power supply in each tape drive CRU to the external power source. Before installing an AC power cord, you must remove the rear bezel door of all the modules in the stack to access the extrusion channels. In a computerroom installation, the excess portion of the AC power cord can be dropped beneath the floor through a cutout in the floor tile. In a non-computer-room installation, AC power cords are routed through the extrusion channels in the rear support members of the modules and held in place by the extrusion guides. Use the following procedure to connect an AC power cord to each tape drive CRU in the modular tape subsystem. This procedure assumes a non-computer-room installation. In a modular tape subsystem with two or three modules, start with the topmost module and work down. 1. Remove the rear bezel door from the module by following the procedure described in Opening and Removing the Rear Bezel Door on page 3-23. 2. Locate the extrusion guides and tie wraps shipped in the plastic bag, and set them aside. After AC power cords and cables have been routed into the extrusion channels, the extrusion guides are used to secure the cords and cables. Tie wraps are included to secure cables to the hinge mounts at the base of the module (see Figure 3-18 on page 3-32). 3. Make sure the AC power switch on the tape drive CRU is set to the OFF (0) position. This prevents power from being supplied to the tape drive accidentally. 4. Plug the AC power cord connector into the AC power receptacle at the rear of the tape drive CRU (see Figure 3-14). 5. Route the AC power cord behind the BEB, if installed, and into the lower cable clamp on the module side wall. Do not fasten the cable clamp. Route the cord into the extrusion channel at the point where the cutout in the rear bezel door allows the cord to pass into the channel when the door is closed. This cutout prevents the door from pinching the cord when the door is closed. Route the cord downward into the channel until you reach the channel bottom. 6. Plug the other end of the AC power cord into the external power source. For information about power requirements, see AC Power Requirements on page 3-9. 7. Repeat Steps 3 through 6, if necessary, for the second tape drive CRU in the module. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 26 Connecting and Routing the AC Power Cords Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem 8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for each remaining module in the modular tape subsystem. Do not install the extrusion guides at this time. Wait until after the cable has been routed through the extrusion channels. Figure 3-14. AC Power Cord Routing AC AC Power Power Cord Switch AC Power Receptacle Lower Cable Clamp AC Power Cord Extrusion Channel To AC Power Source 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 27 Extrusion Guides and Tie Wraps VST025.vsd Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the BEB Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the BEB After you have routed the AC power cords, connect the fiber-optic cable to the BEB installed at the rear of the tape drive CRU. Install the fiber-optic cable connector to the BEB as follows: Caution. Fiber-optic cables have a central core of fragile glass fibers. To prevent breakage, avoid bending the cables sharply and do not handle them roughly. 1. Remove the filler plug from the fiber-optic cable socket on the top of the BEB enclosure. The filler plug is for protection during shipping. 2. Remove the dust cover from the fiber-optic connector at the other end of the cable. 3. Hold the connector so that the keyway meets the key in the BEB enclosure receptacle (see Figure 3-15 on page 3-28). Figure 3-15. Connecting Fiber-Optic Cable to the 5190/5194 BEB Fiber-Optic Cable BEB Enclosure VST036.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 28 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the BEB 4. Insert the connector into the BEB enclosure receptacle until both cantilever arms of the connector click into the transceiver device mounted on the BEB enclosure. 5. Route the fiber-optic cable into the upper and lower cable clamps on the module side wall, and fasten the clamps. Route the cable into the extrusion channel at the point where the cutout in the rear bezel door allows the cable to pass into the channel when the door is closed. This cutout prevents the cable from being pinched when the door is closed. Route the cable downward into the channel until you reach the channel bottom (see Figure 3-16). Caution. Make sure that none of the fiber-optic cables becomes pinched during installation. Do not “loop” the cable within the channel guides. Fiber-optic cable should not be bent more than the maximum bend radius of 10 centimeters (4 inches). 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for the second tape drive in the module and for any other modules in the modular tape subsystem. 7. After fiber-optic cables have been installed into all the tape drive CRUs in all the modules, install the extrusion guides in the channels. The extrusion guides prevent the cables from coming out of the channel. The extrusion guides are flexible and slide onto the ridges of the channel (see Figure 3-16). Caution. Installing the extrusion guides and routing fiber-optic cable behind them prevents the cable from becoming pinched or severed by the rear bezel door when the door is closed. 8. Bring each module online. See Bringing the Tape Drives Online After Installation on page 3-39. 9. Reinstall the rear bezel door for each module, making sure that any AC power cords or cables are routed properly through the door cutouts and into the extrusion channels on the sides of the module. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 29 Connecting a SCSI Cable Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 3-16. Routing Fiber-Optic Cable Through the Extrusion Channel BEB To AC Power Source Cable Clamp To 3216 BIC Extrusion Guide VST027.vsd Connecting a SCSI Cable NonStop Himalaya S-series SCSI cables are not the same as NonStop Himalaya K-series SCSI cables. Their part numbers are listed in Appendix A. Connecting a NonStop Himalaya K-Series SCSI Cable to the Drive CRU At the rear of each tape drive CRU, there are two 50-pin SCSI ports. SCSI cable links one of these ports with the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC. A SCSI terminator covers the other port (see Figure 3-17). Install the cable connector to the SCSI port on the tape drive CRU as follows: 1. Align the 50-pin cable connector with the SCSI port on the right as you face the rear of the drive CRU. Press firmly to seat the connector. 2. Fasten the connector clips. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 30 Connecting a SCSI Cable Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 3-17. Connecting SCSI Cable From the MFC to the Drive CRU SCSI Port SCSI Terminator on Port SCSI Cable to MFC VST016.vsd 3. Make sure that a SCSI terminator is firmly installed in the SCSI port on the left. Removing the SCSI terminator from an unused port can hinder tape drive performance and cause the SCSI interface to function improperly. 4. Route the cable over the hinge mount at the base of the module, securing it with a tie wrap provided in the extrusion guide package. Continue routing the cable into the extrusion channel at the point where the cutout in the rear bezel door allows the cable to pass into the channel when the door is closed. This cutout prevents the cable from being pinched when the door is closed. Route the cable downward into the channel until you reach the channel bottom (see Figure 3-18). 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the second tape drive CRU in the module and for any other modules in the modular tape subsystem (if the drive CRUs are connecting to MFCs). 6. After cables have been installed into all the tape drive CRUs in all the modules, install the extrusion guides in the channels. The extrusion guides are flexible and slide onto the ridges of the channel. The guides prevent the cable from coming out of the channel. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 31 Connecting a SCSI Cable Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem 7. Bring each module online. See Bringing the Tape Drives Online After Installation on page 3-39. 8. Reinstall the rear bezel door for each module, making sure that any AC power cords or cables are routed properly through the door cutouts and into the extrusion channels on the sides of the module. Figure 3-18. Routing SCSI Cable Into the Extrusion Channel Tie Wrap Extrusion Guides SCSI Cable Hinge Mount VST021.vsd Connecting a NonStop Himalaya S-Series SCSI Cable to the Drive CRU At the rear of each tape drive CRU, there are two 50-pin SCSI ports. SCSI cable links one of these ports with a PMF CRU or IOMF CRU. A SCSI terminator covers the other port (see Figure 3-19). Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI port on the tape drive CRU as follows: 1. Find the SCSI cable. The cable is packaged in a separate box when your system is delivered. 2. Align the 50-pin SCSI cable connector, which has latch-clip flanges, with the uncapped SCSI port on the right as you face the rear of the drive CRU. 3. Attach the 50-pin SCSI cable connector to the SCSI port and latch the connector clips. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 32 Connecting a SCSI Cable Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 3-19. Connecting a SCSI Cable From the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU to the Drive CRU SCSI Port SCSI Terminator on Port SCSI Cable to PMF CRU VST046.vsd 4. Make sure that a SCSI terminator is firmly installed in the SCSI port on the left. Removing the SCSI terminator from an unused port can hinder tape drive performance and cause the SCSI interface to function improperly. 5. Route the SCSI cable over the hinge mount at the base of the module, securing it with a tie wrap provided in the extrusion guide package. Continue routing the cable into the extrusion channel at the point where the cutout in the rear bezel door allows the cable to pass into the channel when the door is closed. This cutout prevents the cable from being pinched when the door is closed. Route the cable downward into the channel until you reach the channel bottom. See Figure 3-18 on page 3-32. 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for the second tape drive CRU in the module and for any other modules in the modular tape subsystem (if the drive CRUs are connecting to PMF CRUs). 7. After SCSI cables have been installed into all the tape drive CRUs in all the modules, install the extrusion guides in the channels. The extrusion guides are 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 33 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Connecting Cables to NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers flexible and slide onto the ridges of the channel. The guides prevent the cable from coming out of the channel (see Figure 3-18 on page 3-32). Connecting Cables to NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers Connecting a SCSI Cable to the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Each end of the SCSI cable has a 50-pin cable connector. One end attaches to the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC, and the other end attaches to the uncapped SCSI port at the rear of the tape drive CRU. Install the cable connector to the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC as follows: 1. Plug the connector at one end of the cable into the J5 connector on the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC. 2. Latch the connector clips to secure the connector (see Figure 3-20). Figure 3-20. Connecting SCSI Cable to the MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Red LED Green LED J5 J4 J3 J2 J1 MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Side View MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Front View VST012.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 34 Connecting Cables to NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the 3216 BIC A fiber-optic cable must be installed properly for a tape drive CRU to receive signals from a 3216 controller. The fiber-optic cable has two leads and keyed duplex connectors. One end attaches to the 3216 BIC, and the other end attaches to the BEB at the rear of the tape drive CRU. Install the fiber-optic cable connector to the 3216 BIC as follows: 1. Remove the dust cover from the fiber-optic connector at one end of the cable. 2. Hold the connector so that the keyway meets the key in the BIC receptacle (see Figure 3-21 on page 3-35). 3. Insert the connector into the BIC receptacle until both cantilever arms of the connector click into the transceiver device mounted on the BIC. Figure 3-21. Connecting Fiber-Optic Cable to the 3216 BIC Red LED Green LED Chamfer Key Keyway 3216 BIC Side View Cantilever Arms 3216 BIC Front View VST017.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 35 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Connecting Cables to NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers Connecting Cables to NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers On NonStop Himalaya S-series servers, you can connect a tape drive CRU to a PMF CRU, IOMF CRU, 6761 F-PIC on a 6760 adapter, or 6762 S-PIC on a 6760 adapter. Connecting a SCSI Cable to the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU Connect the SCSI cable to the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU as follows: 1. On NonStop Himalaya S7000, S7400, S70000, or S72000 PMF CRUs or IOMF CRUs, make sure that a SCSI terminator is firmly installed in the SCSI port on the left. (On all other PMF CRUs, the SCSI terminator is located inside the PMF CRU and is not visible.) Removing the SCSI terminator from an unused port can hinder tape drive performance and cause the SCSI interface to function improperly. 2. Plug the SCSI cable connector with the thumbscrews into the SCSI passthrough terminator on the differential SCSI port on the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU residing in either slot 50 or 55 in the system enclosure (see Figure 3-22 for PMF CRU cabling and Figure 3-23 on page 3-38 for IOMF CRU cabling). 3. Tighten the thumbscrews on the SCSI cable connector by hand or use a small slotted screwdriver. 4. Refer to the Himalaya S-Series Hardware Installation Guide for cable routing instructions for the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU. 5. Use SCF to add the modular tape subsystem to your configuration. See Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem Online Using SCF on page 2-25. 6. Bring each tape module online. See Bringing the Tape Drives Online After Installation on page 3-39. 7. Reinstall the rear bezel door for each tape drive module, making sure that any AC power cords or cables are routed properly through the door cutouts and into the extrusion channels on the sides of the module. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 36 Connecting Cables to NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Figure 3-22. Connecting a SCSI Cable to the PMF CRU Himalaya S7000, S7400, S70000, or S72000 Processor Enclosure (Service Side) All Other Himalaya Processor Enclosures (Service Side) 5 0 5 5 SCSI Ports To Tape Drive CRU To Tape Drive CRU VST047.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 37 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Connecting Cables to NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers Figure 3-23. Connecting a SCSI Cable to the IOMF CRU I/O Enclosure (Service Side) IOMF CRU Differential SCSI Port SCSI Passthrough Terminator Cable from the tape subsystem VST040.vsd Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the F-PIC of a 6760 Adapter Refer to the 6760 ServerNet/DA Manual for instructions on connecting a fiber-optic cable to an F-PIC. Connecting a SCSI Cable to the S-PIC of a 6760 Adapter Refer to the 6760 ServerNet/DA Manual for instructions on connecting a SCSI cable to an S-PIC. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 38 Loading the Operating System Image (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Loading the Operating System Image (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) If you used COUP to add the modular tape subsystem to your system configuration, you do not need to load the operating system image. If you did not use COUP, you must load the new operating system image from the SYSnn subvolume created when you ran the DSM/SCM program. You cannot use Peripheral Utility Program (PUP) or Compaq Tandem Maintenance and Diagnostic System (TMDS) commands on the modular tape subsystem if you have not yet prepared the system configuration using the DSM/SCM program. For instructions on loading the operating system image, see the operations manual for your system. Bringing the Tape Drives Online After Installation After the modular tape subsystem has been installed and the cables have been attached, you can bring the tape drives in that subsystem online. Use the following procedure for each tape drive CRU in the modular tape subsystem: 1. Verify that the AC power cord for the drive CRU is plugged into an external power source. 2. If the drive CRU has an ACL, remove the foam packing piece from the cartridge magazine compartment and make sure the cartridge magazine is on its carriage inside the compartment. 3. Apply power to the drive CRU by setting the AC power switch to the ON (|) position (see Figure 3-24). Figure 3-24. AC Power Switch on Tape Drive CRU AC Power Switch Rear of Tape Drive CRU AC Power Cord VST033.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 39 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Bringing the Tape Drives Online After Installation 4. Observe the progress of the power-up self-test on the ACL or drive front panel. See ACL Power-Up Sequence on page 3-41 or Tape Drive Power-Up Sequence on page 3-41. 5. If the drive CRU is attached to a 3216 tape controller or a ServerNet/DA, verify that power is applied to the BEB (the green LED on the BEB is lit when power is on). 6. Check the device ID of the drive. See Checking and Setting the Device ID on page 3-41. 7. If the drive CRU has an ACL, install the cleaning cartridge as described in Installing the Cleaning Cartridge in the ACL on page 3-44. Caution. You must install the cleaning cartridge before operating the ACL. If no cleaning cartridge is installed, a CHK F8 check code appears on the ACL front panel when the automatic cleaning routine is activated. See CHK F8 Check Code on an ACL on page 4-28. 8. Assuming that the drive has been installed and configured, bring up the path to the system using either the PUP UP command or SCF START command. For NonStop Himalaya K-series servers, use PUP as follows: 1>PUP #UP $TAPE1 #EXIT For NonStop Himalaya S-series servers, use SCF as follows: 1>SCF ->START $TAPE1 ->EXIT For more information about using PUP and SCF, see the Peripheral Utility Program (PUP) Reference Manual and the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem, respectively. 9. Run TMDS diagnostics (for NonStop Himalaya K-series servers) or the TSM Service Application or SCF commands (for NonStop Himalaya S-series servers) to ensure the integrity of the modular tape subsystem. TMDS highlights are provided in The TMDS TAPE Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) on page 5-1. Available TSM tests are described in Testing a Tape Device on page 3-46. SCF commands are described in Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) on page 3-46 as well as in Section 4, Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 40 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Checking and Setting the Device ID ACL Power-Up Sequence An AC power switch at the rear of a tape drive CRU controls power to both the drive and the ACL. When power is applied, the ACL performs a series of self-tests to verify operation of the ACL control panel LEDs and the autoloader. The power-up sequence includes the following events on the ACL front panel: 1. The LEDs and tape-position indicators light. 2. The blinking SELFTEST message appears on the message panel. The cartridge position indicator cycles through the slot positions. 3. The DOOR LOCK LED lights. The EJECTING message appears on the message panel. The AUTO LED lights. 4. The SEL LED flickers to indicate that the formatter is polling the drive for information. 5. An asterisk (*) appears on the message panel to indicate that the drive is ready for operation. If the magazine door is open during the power-up sequence, a message prompts you to close the door. The drive is ready for operation when an asterisk (*) appears on the message panel. You can load a cartridge at this point by pressing the START button. If an error message appears during the power-up sequence, see Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes on page 4-31. Tape Drive Power-Up Sequence When power is applied to a tape drive, the drive performs a series of self-tests to verify operation. The power-up sequence includes the following events on the drive front panel. Just after power is applied, the LEDs and tape-position indicators light and the SELFTEST message appears on the message panel. If a cartridge is loaded, the drive automatically rewinds the tape and ejects the cartridge. The drive is ready for operation when an asterisk (*) appears on the message panel. You can load a cartridge at this point by inserting the cartridge and pressing the START button. If an error message appears during the power-up sequence, see Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes on page 4-31. Checking and Setting the Device ID The device ID of a tape drive identifies the drive to the system. You can display the device ID, which is set by the tape drive CRU firmware, by using the operator buttons on the drive or ACL front panel. Unless the modular tape subsystem is included with a system order, tape drive CRUs are shipped with a device ID of 5. Refer to Table 3-3 on page 3-5 for other supported device IDs, depending the connecting controller or adapter. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 41 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Checking and Setting the Device ID Using the Operator Buttons to Check or Set the Device ID The device ID of a tape drive is stored in nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). You can check or set the device ID using the operator buttons on the drive or ACL front panel. Power must be applied to the drive before you can check or set the device ID. The procedure is the same for drives with and without ACLs. If you want to familiarize yourself with the drive and ACL front-panel controls before beginning this procedure, review Section 4, Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL. Use Steps 1 through 8 of the following procedure to check the device ID. Use the entire procedure if you want to change the device ID. To end the procedure at any time, press SHIFT + RESET and press RESET again to initiate the self-test and restart the drive. After restart, an asterisk (*) should appear on the message panel of the drive or ACL front panel. 1. If the tape drive has an ACL, unload any loaded cartridge by pressing the RESET and then the UNLOAD button. Then press RESET again until an asterisk (*) appears on the message panel. Remove the cartridge magazine and close the door. If the tape drive does not have an ACL, unload any cartridge currently loaded in the drive by pressing the RESET and then the UNLOAD button. 2. Press the TEST and UNLOAD buttons simultaneously and hold for at least three seconds. This places the drive in the diagnostic mode. The following appears on the message panel: DIAGMODE 3. Press the START button to begin the process. The message panel shows: SETTING 4. Press START again to select configuration mode. The message panel shows: SEL MTC 5. Press the TEST button to take the controller offline. The message panel shows: CTLR OFL... PUSH STR 6. Press START to enter the configuration mode. The message panel shows: 00:CNFG 7. Press TEST to begin the device ID set mode. This message on the message panel identifies the device ID mode: 1:TADDR 8. Press TEST to display the current device ID on the message panel. ADR:4 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 42 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Checking and Setting the Device ID 9. To change the device ID, press START to increment the ID counter to the device ID value you want to use. The counter increments from 0 through 7, but you must use only device ID 4 or 5. ADR:5 For a module containing two tape drive CRUs attached to one 3216 controller (NonStop Himalaya K-series servers only), always set the device ID for the drive CRU located on the left (as you face the front of the module) to 5. Set the device ID of the drive CRU on the right to 4. See Figure 3-1 on page 3-6 for a diagram showing this arrangement. 10. Press TEST to set the new device ID. The message panel displays: 1:END 11. Press START repeatedly until the following message displays: Z:WTNVR 12. Press TEST to display the confirmation message for writing the new device ID to NVRAM. WTNVR: N 13. Press START to change N to Y (yes). WTNVR: Y 14. Press TEST to store the new device ID in NVRAM. The message panel shows: B:END 15. Press the SHIFT and RESET buttons simultaneously to end the procedure. The message panel shows: SEL MTC 16. Press RESET to restart the drive. The drive or ACL performs self-test diagnostics and shows the following messages, after which the message panel displays an asterisk (*). UNLOADNG... SELFTEST 17. Replace the cartridge magazine in the ACL. If the drive or ACL front panel returns an error message after you perform this procedure, press the RESET button and repeat the procedure. If you continue to get an error message, cycle the power and repeat the procedure. Contact your service provider if you are unable to clear the message. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 43 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Installing the Cleaning Cartridge in the ACL Checking the New Device ID After setting the device ID, it’s a good idea to cycle power to the drive using the AC power switch and then check the value stored in NVRAM to make sure the new device ID is correct. You can do this by repeating Steps 2 through 8 of the procedure in Using the Operator Buttons to Check or Set the Device ID on page 3-42. If the device ID is incorrect, follow the remaining steps of that procedure to correct it. Installing the Cleaning Cartridge in the ACL A cartridge magazine, blank cartridge tape, and cleaning cartridge come in a separate package with each tape drive CRU that has an ACL. Be sure to install the cleaning cartridge before operating the ACL. You can use the operator buttons on the ACL front panel to load the cleaning cartridge from the cartridge magazine into a chamber within the ACL. For more information about the cleaning cartridge, see Using a Cleaning Cartridge on page 4-4. When you have successfully placed the tape drive online, use the following procedure to install the cleaning cartridge: 1. Remove the cartridge magazine from the ACL, and mount the cleaning cartridge in the top slot (slot 1). Make sure that all other slots in the cartridge magazine are empty. 2. Place the cartridge magazine (with the cleaning cartridge) in the ACL, and close the magazine compartment door. 3. Make sure the ACL is ready for operation. An asterisk (*) appears on the ACL message panel when the ACL is ready. If any other message appears, press the RESET button until the asterisk appears. 4. Press the SHIFT and UNLOAD buttons simultaneously to place the ACL in the installation mode. The message CHG CLN appears on the message panel. 5. Press the TEST button twice to start the installation sequence. The ACL first loads the new cleaning cartridge from slot 1 into the drive to confirm the cartridge type. It then loads the new cleaning cartridge into the cleaning cartridge chamber. The ACL is ready for operation when the asterisk (*) reappears on the message panel. You can replace the cleaning cartridge using a similar procedure. See Replacing a Cleaning Cartridge in an ACL on page 6-10. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 44 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) This subsection describes the COUP, PUP, and TMDS commands you can use to start and test your tape devices after the modular tape subsystem is installed. Starting a Tape Device You can use either the COUP START command or the PUP UP command to start a tape device after the modular tape subsystem has been installed. The following is an example of a COUP START command: 11) START $TAPE0 IOP for device $TAPE0 successfully started in CPU 0. IOP for device $TAPE0 successfully started in CPU 1. Device $TAPE0 has been successfully started. For more on the COUP START command, see Example 4: Starting a Tape Drive on page 2-11 or refer to the Dynamic System Configuration (DSC) Manual. The following is an example of a PUP UP command: >PUP UP $TAPE0 For more on the PUP UP command, see Bringing Up a Cartridge Tape Drive on page 4-33 or refer to the Peripheral Utility Program (PUP) Reference Manual. Testing a Tape Device Once the modular tape subsystem has been installed, you can test a tape device that has been started by using the TMDS TEST and EXERCISE commands. The TMDS TEST command executes various tests on the tape device and tape controller. The basic TEST command has the following syntax: TEST [DRIVE] $drive [, [TESTNAME] testname] Because there is no default test name for the 5190 and 5194 tape drives, you must specify a value for testname. The following is an example of a TEST command that runs the BEB-LPBK test, which performs BEB loopback tests: TAPE> TEST DRIVE $TAPE7, TESTNAME BEB-LPBK For a list of possible values for testname, see the TMDS Reference Manual. The TMDS EXERCISE command verifies a tape device’s read and write capability, checks the tape motion, and verifies the tape hardware after repairs and during installation. The basic EXERCISE command has the following syntax: EXERCISE [DRIVE] $drive 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 45 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) You have the option of specifying parameters that denote the length of tape to write, the length of the records to be written to tape, the mode in which the tape should be exercised, and so on. The following is an example of an EXERCISE command that tests a streaming tape device in stream mode for two loops using a record length of 24: TAPE> EXERCISE $TAPE0, LOOP 2, RECLENGTH 24, & TAPE> &ENDSTATE UNLOAD, TAPEMODE STREAM For details on the TMDS TAPE subsystem and TMDS TAPE commands, refer to Section 5, Using TMDS or the TSM Package, or the TMDS Reference Manual. Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) This subsection describes the SCF commands you can use to start and test your tape devices after the modular tape subsystem is installed. Starting a Tape Device You use the SCF START TAPE command to start a tape device after the modular tape subsystem has been installed. The START command makes a stopped tape drive accessible to user processes. When the START command finishes successfully, the tape drive is in the STARTED state. The following is an example of an SCF START TAPE command: ->START $TAPE0 For more on the START command, see Starting a Cartridge Tape Drive on page 4-37 and refer to the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. Testing a Tape Device You can use the TSM package, BACKUP and RESTORE, or SCF to test tape subsystems. 1. The TSM Service Application supports the following tests for tape subsystems: TSM Action Information Source Tape Responsive Test From the TSM Service Application, verifies that a tape drive is installed and responding. Test Extended From the TSM Service Application, performs a loop write-toread test. Test Verify From the TSM Service Application, runs a POST on the tape drive, plus additional tests to isolate problems (tape drive must be down state). 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 46 Testing a Tape Device Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Refer to the TSM application online help for help on using the TSM windows and dialog boxes. For more information about TSM concepts, commands, and dialog boxes and how to perform TSM tape tasks, see the TSM Online User Guide. 2. You can use the BACKUP and RESTORE utilities to effectively test the status of tape drives. For information on BACKUP and RESTORE, refer to the Guardian Disk and Tape Utilities Reference Manual. 3. You can use SCF commands to obtain status information about a tape subsystem. The DETAIL attribute of the SCF STATUS TAPE command produces a report that shows the processor numbers for the tape process, the logical device number of the tape drive, and the current state of the tape drive. The following is an example of an SCF STATUS TAPE, DETAIL command: ->STATUS TAPE $TAPE0, DETAIL STORAGE - Detailed Status TAPE \TEST.$TAPE0 Tape Process Information: LDev State Primary PID 135 STARTED 0,296 Backup PID 1,317 DeviceStatus NOT READY Tape I/O Process Information: Library File....... Program File....... $SYSTEM.SYS32.OTPPROCP Current Settings: ACL................ Checksum Mode...... *Density............ Opens.............. Short Write Mode... Volume Switching... NOT INSTALLED NORMAL I/O 38000 0 ALLOWED, PADDED TRANSPARENT Buffer Level...... *Compression....... Media Type........ *RecSize........... SubType........... REEL ON 36-TRACKS 8192 9 Media Information: Automatic Volume Recognition Labels: VOL1: SANYOA HDR1: D87D040 SANYOA00010001000100000028 000000000000 HDR2: F080000080000 B This report shows $TAPE0 is: • • • • • • Using processor 0 as the primary processor Using processor 1 as the backup processor Logical device 135 In the STARTED state Has a subtype of 9 (the type is 4) A 36-track (5194) tape drive See the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem for a description of the information shown in this example detail report. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 47 Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem For more on the STATUS command, see Checking the Status of a Cartridge Tape Drive on page 4-35 or refer to the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) The following troubleshooting tables help you identify and correct problems that can occur when you install the modular tape subsystem. Each table addresses a specific problem, lists symptoms related to the possible cause of the problem, and lists actions you can take to correct the problem. If you need further help solving an installation problem, call your service provider. Green LED Not Lit on a Logic Board Symptom Green LED not lit on any logic boards. Green LED not lit on one logic board. Corrective Action 1. Start the system. 2. Make sure power is supplied to the system or I/O cabinet. 3. Contact your service provider. • Reseat the logic board: • a. Unscrew the thumbscrews on the ejectors and then lift both ejectors at the same time to disconnect the logic board from the backplane. b. Pull the logic board 2 inches out of its slot. c. Push the logic board into its slot until the front of the logic board is flush with the other logic boards. d. Press both ejectors into place at the same time and then tighten the thumbscrews. If the green LED still does not light, contact your service provider. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 48 Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Red LED Lit on a Logic Board Symptom Corrective Action Red LED on a logic board is lit for less than 1 minute after the system starts. None; normal self-test operation. Red LED on a logic board stays lit for more than 1 minute. If two tape drives are attached to the same 3216 controller, make sure that their device IDs are set to 4 and 5. See Checking and Setting the Device ID on page 3-41. Otherwise, contact your service provider. Green LED Not Lit on a BIC Symptom Corrective Action Green LED not lit on any BICs. Start the system or contact your service provider. Green LED not lit on one BIC. Reseat the BIC: 1. Unscrew the thumbscrews. 2. Grasp the BIC at the top and bottom and pull it out of the slot. 3. Push the BIC into the slot and tighten the thumbscrews. 4. If the green LED still does not light, contact your service provider. Red LED Lit on a BIC Symptom Corrective Action Red LED on a BIC is lit for less than 1 minute after the system starts. None; normal self-test operation. Red LED on a BIC stays lit for more than 1 minute. Contact your service provider. Green LED Not Lit on a BEB Symptom Green LED not lit inside BEB enclosure. Corrective Action 1. Make sure the tape drive CRU is powered on. 2. See Table 6-1 on page 6-2 for possible causes. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 49 Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Yellow LED Not Lit on a BEB Symptom Corrective Action Yellow LED not lit inside BEB enclosure. 1. Make sure that both the tape drive CRU and the 3216 logic board are powered on. 2. See Table 6-1 on page 6-2 for possible causes. 3. Check the integrity of the fiber-optic cable connection: a. Inspect the cable connectors at the BIC and BEB ends. Make sure the connectors have not been forced in backward. The connector keyway must mate with the key in the receptacle. b. Replace the cable or inspect the cable for defects or kinks. c. Make sure the cable maximum bend radius of 10 centimeters (4 inches) has not been exceeded. d. If the yellow LED still does not light, contact your service provider. ACL Door Does Not Open Symptom Corrective Action ACL door does not open when ACL is powered down. 1. Apply power to the tape drive CRU, unload any cartridge in the drive, and reset the ACL by pressing the RESET button until the asterisk (*) appears on the message panel. Then open the door. 2. Defeat the door lock mechanism manually. See Unlocking the ACL Door When Power Is Removed on page 4-20. ACL Does Not Function Properly Symptom ACL does not respond to commands, or it functions abnormally. Corrective Action Contact your service provider. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 50 Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem ACL Does Not Come Online Symptom Corrective Action The message panel flashes SELFTEST CTRL after power is applied and then displays CHK 98. (The SEL LED might not flicker, indicating that the drive formatter is not polling the drive.) Make sure a SCSI terminator is firmly installed on the unused SCSI port on the back of the tape drive CRU. Then turn power off and on again. See also Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes on page 4-31. If the error message or check code persists, contact your service provider. Tape Drive Does Not Function Properly Symptom Tape drive does not respond to software commands, or it functions abnormally. Corrective Action 1. Use TMDS commands to isolate the problem in the tape drive CRU, controller, or BEB. See Section 5, Using TMDS or the TSM Package, or the details about the TAPE subsystem in the TMDS Reference Manual. 2. If you are unable to isolate the problem, contact your service provider. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 51 Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) The following troubleshooting tables help you identify and correct problems that can occur when you install the modular tape subsystem. Each table addresses a specific problem, lists symptoms related to the possible cause of the problem, and lists actions you can take to correct the problem. In general, if you suspect a hardware problem, do the following: 1. Use TSM to check the hardware. For the 6760 adapter, TSM test procedures are described in the 6760 ServerNet/DA Manual. 2. Use the SCF STATUS ADAPTER, DETAIL command to check the status of all paths to the adapter and its attached devices. 3. Use the SCF INFO ADAPTER, DETAIL command to verify proper configuration. If you need further help solving an installation problem, call your service provider. ACL Door Does Not Open Symptom Corrective Action ACL door does not open when ACL is powered down. 1. Apply power to the tape drive CRU, unload any cartridge in the drive, and reset the ACL by pressing the RESET button until the asterisk (*) appears on the message panel. Then open the door. 2. Defeat the door lock mechanism manually. See Unlocking the ACL Door When Power Is Removed on page 4-20. ACL Does Not Function Properly Symptom ACL does not respond to commands, or it functions abnormally. Corrective Action Contact your service provider. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 52 Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem ACL Does Not Come Online Symptom Corrective Action The message panel flashes SELFTEST CTRL after power is applied and then displays CHK 98. (The SEL LED might not flicker, indicating that the drive formatter is not polling the drive.) 1. Make sure a SCSI cable (one of the cables listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers) connects the tape drive CRU from the S-PIC either to the SCSI passthrough terminator on the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU (on a NonStop Himalaya S7000, S7400, S70000, or S72000 PMF CRU), or to the SCSI port (on other model PMF CRUs). 2. On a NonStop Himalaya S7000, S7400, S70000, or S72000 PMF CRU or an IOMF CRU, make sure a SCSI terminator is firmly installed on the unused SCSI port on the back of the tape drive CRU. Then turn power off and on again. See also Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes on page 4-31. If the error message or check code persists, contact your service provider. Tape Drive Does Not Function Properly Symptom Tape drive does not respond to software commands, or it functions abnormally. Corrective Action 1. Make sure a SCSI cable (one of the cables listed in Appendix A, Part Numbers) connects the tape drive CRU either to the SCSI passthrough terminator on the PMF CRU or IOMF CRU (on a NonStop Himalaya S7000, S7400, S70000, or S72000 PMF CRU or an IOMF CRU), or to the SCSI port (on other NonStop PMF CRUs). 2. Use SCF commands to isolate the problem in the tape drive CRU. See examples of SCF commands in Section 4, Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL. Refer to the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem for additional SCF commands, including the RESET TAPE command with the FORCED option, which stops and restarts the tape process. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 53 Installing the Modular Tape Subsystem Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 3- 54 4 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL This section tells you how to operate the 5190 and 5194 tape drives and automatic cartridge loader (ACL). Terms that appear in bold are defined in the glossary of this manual. This section covers the following topics: Topic Page Common Operations 4-1 Handling and Transporting Cartridge Tapes 4-2 Operating a Tape Drive With an ACL 4-5 Operating a Tape Drive Without an ACL 4-22 Cleaning a Tape Drive 4-27 Understanding Operator Messages 4-28 Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes 4-31 Using PUP With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 4-32 Using SCF With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 4-35 Using the TSM Package With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 4-38 Using BACKUP and RESTORE With the Modular Tape Subsystem 4-38 TMF Support 4-41 Using Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes on NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers 4-42 Preparing a Tape Drive for Online Dumps (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 4-43 Using Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes on NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers 4-43 Controlling Data Compression (5190 Tape Drive) 4-44 Programming and Configuration Considerations 4-53 Unless stated otherwise, each topic applies to both K-series servers and NonStop Himalaya S-series servers. Common Operations If you are already familiar with cartridge tape drives, you can perform some simple operations right away. Table 4-1 on page 4-2 summarizes the most common operations that use operator buttons on the ACL or drive front panel. For a description 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4 -1 Handling and Transporting Cartridge Tapes Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL of the READY and NOT READY states, see Understanding Operator Messages on page 4-28. Table 4-1. Common 5190 and 5194 Tape Drive Operations To do this... Press... Notes Make the drive READY START Cartridge must be inserted and drive must be in the NOT READY state. Rewind a tape START Cartridge must be inserted and drive must be in the NOT READY state. Unload and eject a tape UNLOAD Drive must be in the NOT READY or ERROR state. Make the drive NOT READY RESET (once) Pressing RESET once makes the drive NOT READY. Clear an error message or check code RESET (twice) Pressing RESET a second time clears the error messages. Handling and Transporting Cartridge Tapes Handling a cartridge improperly or exposing the tape can result in a loss of data. Observe the following practices when handling cartridge tapes (refer to Figure 1-2 on page 1-4): • • • • Protect cartridge tapes from shock or vibration. See Table 4-2 for environmental requirements when operating, storing, and transporting cartridge tapes. Do not expose cartridge tapes to high temperatures by leaving them in a car or in direct sunlight. When you receive a cartridge that has been transported, allow the cartridge to adjust to the operating environment for at least 24 hours before you use it. Do not remove the leader block, pull out the tape, or press the reel lock. If the leader block becomes detached from the tape, contact a tape supplier for a leader block repair kit. Table 4-2. Environmental Requirements for Cartridge Tapes Factor Operation Storage and Transportation Temperature 16 to 32 °C (60 to 90 °F) 5 to 32 °C (41 to 90 °F) Humidity (noncondensing) 20 to 80% 5 to 80% Maximum wet bulb temperature 25 °C (78 °F) 26 °C (80 °F) 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4 -2 Storing Cartridge Tapes Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Storing Cartridge Tapes Observe the following precautions when storing cartridge tapes: • • • • Follow the requirements listed in Table 4-2 on page 4-2 for storing cartridge tapes. Do not store cartridges near maximum temperature and humidity for more than three months. Do not store cartridges near a strong magnetic field such as a permanent magnet or an electromagnet. Do not store cartridges in direct sunlight. Setting the File-Protect Thumbwheel You can position the file-protect thumbwheel on a cartridge to prevent erasing or altering data on the tape. When the flat surface (with the white dot) is parallel with the edge of the cartridge, an application program can read data from the cartridge tape but cannot write (or erase) data on the tape. The unprotected position is 180 degrees around from the file-protected position (see Figure 4-1). To stop protecting the data on the cartridge, use your thumb or fingernail to roll the file-protect thumbwheel until the white dot is inside the cartridge. When the white dot is not in view, an application program can both read data from and write data to the cartridge tape. Figure 4-1. Setting the File-Protect Thumbwheel on a Cartridge Tape Write Enabled Position Write Inhibited (File-Protect) Position VST029.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4 -3 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using Damaged Cartridges Using Damaged Cartridges Using a damaged cartridge risks damage to the tape drive. Use a damaged cartridge only long enough to transfer the stored data, if possible, to another cartridge. Then discard the damaged cartridge. If the leader block separates from the tape, or if an attached leader block is damaged, you might be able to repair the damage with a leader block repair kit. Contact the cartridge manufacturer or distributor for information about purchasing this kit. Caution. Do not try to use a drive if a detached leader block remains inside. Doing so could damage the cartridge tape drive. Call your service provider. Using a Cleaning Cartridge A cleaning cartridge is required for periodic cleaning of the tape drive. The cleaning cartridge loads into the drive like any other cartridge tape. The drive identifies the cleaning cartridge by a special groove on the cartridge housing and begins the cleaning process immediately. The cleaning process takes about a minute. After cleaning is completed, the drive unloads the cartridge. See Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 4-27. The ACL has a compartment for a cleaning cartridge that automatically cleans the drive after the tape equivalent of 20 cartridges has passed over the drive head. The message panel on the ACL informs you when the cleaning cartridge needs to be replaced. The ACL cleaning cartridge comes packaged separately and must be installed before you can operate the ACL. To install the ACL cleaning cartridge, see Installing the Cleaning Cartridge in the ACL on page 3-44. To replace the ACL cleaning cartridge, see Replacing a Cleaning Cartridge in an ACL on page 6-10. Most cleaning cartridges are clearly marked with the number of cleaning cycles they provide. Use only cartridges from a reputable manufacturer that provide 100 cleaning cycles. To prevent problems with reading and writing tape, even if you have a 500-count cleaning cartridge, do not use the cleaning cartridge for more than 100 cleaning cycles. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4 -4 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Operating a Tape Drive With an ACL Operating a Tape Drive With an ACL Most 5190 and 5194 tape drive CRUs are shipped with an automatic cartridge loader (ACL). The following paragraphs describe how to operate a tape drive CRU that has an ACL. In this configuration, the rear of the ACL mates with the front of the drive. When an ACL is attached, the drive is not visible from the front of the module. If the tape drive you want to use does not have an ACL, see Operating a Tape Drive Without an ACL on page 4-22. This subsection includes the following topics: Topic Page Controls on the ACL Front Panel 4-6 Bringing the ACL and Tape Drive Online or Offline 4-10 Using the Cartridge Magazine 4-11 Removing the Cartridge Magazine 4-12 Mounting Cartridges in the Magazine 4-14 Loading the Cartridge Magazine 4-15 Removing Cartridges From the Magazine Using the Cartridge Locking Bar 4-16 Setting the File-Protect Switch 4-17 Selecting the Operating Mode 4-18 Rewinding and Unloading Cartridges 4-18 Rewinding a Tape to BOT 4-19 Unlocking the ACL Door When Power Is Removed 4-20 Caution. Before operating a tape drive equipped with an ACL, make sure the cleaning cartridge is installed. To check for a cleaning cartridge, unload any cartridge from the drive, remove the cartridge magazine, and look inside the ACL. The cleaning cartridge chamber is located at the rear on top. If a cleaning cartridge is not installed, you must install one for normal operation. See Installing the Cleaning Cartridge in the ACL on page 3-44. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4 -5 Controls on the ACL Front Panel Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Controls on the ACL Front Panel Before using the ACL, familiarize yourself with the ACL front panel, shown in Figure 4-2. The front panel consists of a control panel, magazine compartment window, and push-button door release. The entire front-panel assembly swings open to provide access to the magazine compartment. The ACL control panel consists of the following elements: • • • • • Tape position LEDs Message panel Status indicator LEDs Operator buttons Cartridge position indicator Figure 4-2. ACL Front Panel Magazine Compartment Window Tape Position LEDs BOT EOT Message Panel ATTN ACL Control Panel SEL COMP DOOR LOCK POSITION MANUAL AUTO MODE SEL SYSTEM START UNLOAD RESET SHIFT TEST Push Open Push Close Door Release Air Vents Part Number Label 113644 A01-04 COD824 VST015.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4 -6 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Controls on the ACL Front Panel Tape Position LEDs Seven amber LEDs form a horizontal line at the top of the control panel and indicate the tape position. The BOT (beginning-of-tape) LED lights when the tape is completely rewound. As tape moves through the drive, neighboring LEDs to the right light sequentially to indicate the tape position. When the tape is moving, the rightmost LED that is lit flashes on and off; when the tape is stopped, the rightmost LED that is lit remains lit without flashing. (This LED sequence is the only sequence for the 5190 tape drive.) The 5194 tape drive uses the same LED sequence for writing or reading 18-track data to the physical end of the tape. The 5194 tape drive then reverses the sequence as it continues writing or reading the additional 18 tracks of data (resulting in 36 tracks of data) back to the physical beginning of the tape. (For the 5194 tape drive, the physical beginning of the tape is also the end-of-tape position.) End-of-Tape LED Sequence for the 5190 Tape Drive When the cartridge reaches the physical end of the tape in a 5190 tape drive, it also reaches the end-of-tape (EOT) position. All seven tape position LEDs are lit. At this point, the 5190 tape drive is finished writing or reading 18-track data. When the 5190 tape drive is at EOT, the tape must be rewound or repositioned to an earlier point on the tape. End-of-Tape LED Sequence for the 5194 Tape Drive When the cartridge reaches the physical end of the tape in a 5194 drive, it has reached only the halfway point (sometimes called wrap 1) for writing or reading data. All seven tape position LEDs are lit. At this point, the 5194 tape drive continues writing or reading 18-track data (sometimes called wrap 1) for a total of 36 tracks, back to the physical beginning of the tape. As tape moves through the drive (back toward the physical beginning of tape), neighboring LEDs to the left become unlit sequentially (starting with the BOT LED at the far left). When the tape is moving, the leftmost LED that is lit flashes on and off; when the tape is stopped, the leftmost LED that is lit remains lit without flashing. For the 5194 tape drive, when the cartridge reaches the end-of-tape (EOT), the EOT LED is the only LED lit. When the 5194 tape drive is at EOT, the tape is also at the physical beginning of the tape. For that reason, whenever you write the first record at BOT you might notice the EOT LED flash on briefly. You’ll also notice that rewind time is minimal if the read or write operation uses the entire tape. A flashing (blinking) tape position LED indicates that tape is in motion. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4 -7 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Controls on the ACL Front Panel Message Panel The message panel on the ACL control panel can simultaneously display up to eight alphanumeric characters or symbols. These combine to form status messages. For examples of status messages, see Understanding Operator Messages on page 4-28. Status Indicator LEDs The ACL control panel contains seven LEDs that indicate current operating conditions. Table 4-3 lists the LEDs and summarizes their functions. Table 4-3. ACL Front-Panel Status Indicator LEDs LED Function ATTN (Attention) Not used (always unlit) AUTO Lights when the ACL is in the auto (default) mode COMP (Compression) Lights when the drive reads or writes compressed or blocked data DOOR LOCK Lights when the ACL magazine door is locked MANUAL Not used (always unlit) SEL (Selected) Flashes on and off when the drive formatter is polling the drive SYSTEM Not used (always unlit) For more information on compression and the COMP (compression) LED, see Controlling Data Compression (5190 Tape Drive) on page 4-44. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4 -8 Controls on the ACL Front Panel Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Operator Buttons The ACL control panel features seven operator buttons. Table 4-4 lists the buttons and summarizes their functions. Confirmation messages appear on the message panel after you press a button. These buttons are inactive when the ACL magazine door is open or when the ACL does not contain a cartridge magazine. Note that normal operation does not require use of the SHIFT and TEST buttons, which are reserved for factory diagnostics. You can run operator diagnostics using TMDS (see the TAPE subsystem information in the TMDS Reference Manual). Table 4-4. ACL Operator Buttons Operator Button Function Notes MODE SEL Changes the operating mode Compaq NonStop Himalaya systems support only the auto mode. See Selecting the Operating Mode on page 4-18. POSITION Selects the cartridge to be loaded from the magazine Press this button (when a cartridge is not loaded) to increment the position indicator by one. Any of the seven cartridges, or the cleaning cartridge, can be selected for loading. The topmost cartridge in the magazine is the default cartridge when no cartridge has been selected. RESET Changes the READY state of the drive Press RESET once to place the drive in the NOT READY state if it is currently in the READY state. Clears error messages Press RESET twice to clear the message panel. SHIFT Reserved for factory diagnostics START Starts the autoloader mechanism and loads a cartridge The magazine must be placed in the ACL and the door must be closed. The ACL must be in the auto mode (the system and manual modes are not supported). In the auto mode, the topmost cartridge in the magazine is loaded into the drive. Rewinds the tape, if necessary, and changes the drive to the READY state This action occurs when a tape is loaded and the drive is in the NOT READY state. TEST Reserved for factory diagnostics Press TEST and hold down to display complete text for a check code or error message. UNLOAD Unloads the cartridge and ejects it into the magazine The drive must be in the NOT READY state. Press START to load the next cartridge. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4 -9 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Bringing the ACL and Tape Drive Online or Offline Cartridge Position Indicator A seven-segment LED display in the center of the ACL control panel displays the cartridge position number currently selected by the ACL autoloader mechanism. The ACL lets you select which cartridge to load (from one of seven slots in the cartridge magazine). To change the selected cartridge position number, you press the POSITION button on the control panel. In addition to the numbers 1 through 7, seven other codes can appear on the cartridge position indicator. Table 4-5 lists these codes and describes events that display them. Table 4-5. Cartridge Position Indicator Codes Code Description -- The magazine is in the magazine compartment and the door is closed. * The drive is ready for operation. No cartridge is loaded. A The autoloader elevator mechanism is active. C The cleaning cartridge is selected. E The autoloader has detected an error. F The magazine can be removed. H A cartridge has been loaded without using the magazine (not recommended). Bringing the ACL and Tape Drive Online or Offline A tape drive must have a tape cartridge loaded before it can be brought online. The tape cartridge must be unloaded before the tape drive can be brought offline. The following table summarizes the operator activities: Action Result Press Push Open/Push Close button You can open the magazine door to add or replace tape cartridges Press Push Open/Push Close button Closes the magazine door Press START Cartridge is loaded into tape drive and door is locked (drive is online) Press RESET, UNLOAD, and RESET again Cartridge is unloaded from tape drive and door is unlocked (drive is offline) If power is removed from the ACL while the DOOR LOCK LED is unlit, the door can be opened and the magazine can be removed. If power is removed while the DOOR LOCK LED is lit, the door remains locked to protect the cartridges within the ACL and drive. See Unlocking the ACL Door When Power Is Removed on page 4-20. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 10 Using the Cartridge Magazine Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using the Cartridge Magazine The cartridge magazine is a removable plastic assembly that holds seven cartridge tapes for automatic loading and unloading. Each ACL is shipped with one cartridge magazine (you can order more from Compaq). The magazine rests on a spring-loaded carriage at the base of the ACL. A handle on the magazine lets you lift it out of the ACL and use it to transport up to seven cartridges. Figure 4-3 shows the cartridge magazine. Figure 4-3. ACL Cartridge Magazine Handle Lock Release Button Master File-Protect Switch Cartridge Locking Bars Back of Magazine Front of Magazine VST019.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 11 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Removing the Cartridge Magazine Removing the Cartridge Magazine To remove the cartridge magazine from the ACL, refer to Figure 4-4 and use the following procedure: 1. Open the ACL magazine door. The ACL magazine door serves as the front panel of the ACL. The front-panel assembly swings open to provide access to the magazine compartment. The DOOR LOCK status indicator LED lights whenever the ACL has disabled the dooropen button on the magazine door. The door locks once the autoloader is set in motion. This is a safety feature to protect the operator and prevent damage to the autoloader mechanism. a. To open the ACL magazine door, first make sure that the DOOR LOCK LED is unlit. If it is unlit, press the Push Open/Push Close button. b. To close the ACL magazine door, swing the door shut and press the Push Open/Push Close button—not the door—to engage the door latch. 2. Push on the face of the carriage (where it is labeled PUSH). The carriage telescopes out of the ACL, allowing you to lift the magazine out of the carriage. WARNING. Do not insert your hand inside the ACL for any reason. Doing so could cause personal injury or damage the autoloader. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 12 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Removing the Cartridge Magazine Figure 4-4. Removing the Cartridge Magazine 1 2 Front of Magazine 3 4 5 6 ACL Carriage P U S H Back of Magazine VST034.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 13 Mounting Cartridges in the Magazine Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Mounting Cartridges in the Magazine The numbers 1 through 7 on the face of the cartridge magazine indicate the slots into which you can mount cartridges (see Figure 4-5). During operation, the cartridge position indicator on the ACL control panel (see Figure 4-2 on page 4-6) shows the slot from which a cartridge has been loaded. Figure 4-5. Cartridge Magazine Slot Numbers Handle 1 2 3 Slot Numbers 4 5 (Front of Magazine) (Back of Magazine) 6 7 VST022.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 14 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Loading the Cartridge Magazine Before mounting a cartridge in the cartridge magazine, do the following: 1. Wipe the cartridge, if necessary, with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth to avoid introducing dust into the drive. 2. Inspect the cartridge for damage to the case, the leader block, the leader block latch, or the file-protect thumbwheel. See Using Damaged Cartridges on page 4-4 and refer to Figure 1-2 on page 1-4. 3. Make sure the leader block is firmly lodged under the lip of the cartridge housing. Loose leader blocks can cause loading errors. 4. Check the setting of the file-protect thumbwheel (see Figure 4-1 on page 4-3). Always remove the cartridge magazine from the ACL before attempting to mount cartridges into it. This gives you access to the cartridge locking bars, which can help you dislodge a cartridge that is accidentally mounted backward. To mount a cartridge in the cartridge magazine, do the following: 1. Identify the front of the magazine (see Figure 4-4 on page 4-13). The front of the magazine faces inside the ACL, and the back of the magazine faces the ACL magazine door. The magazine handle falls toward the ACL magazine door. 2. With the leader block edge of the cartridge facing the back of the magazine, slide the cartridge into the appropriate slot until the cartridge locking bar locks the cartridge into place. If you try to operate the ACL when a cartridge has been mounted upside down or backward, the following error message appears on the message panel: CARRIER CLASHES AGAINST A CARTRIDGE OR CHK 21 ERROR If you receive this message, reinstall the cartridge correctly in the cartridge magazine and retry the operation. Loading the Cartridge Magazine Caution. Do not reach inside the ACL magazine compartment when the cartridge magazine has been removed. Do not attempt to load a cartridge into the tape drive without first mounting it in the cartridge magazine. Placing anything other than the cartridge magazine in the magazine compartment can damage the autoloader mechanism and produce error messages. Loading a cartridge magazine means inserting it into the tape drive. After you mount cartridges in the cartridge magazine, do the following: 1. With the ACL carriage extended, lower the cartridge magazine into place, letting the handle lie flat on top of the magazine and falling toward the front of the ACL. Push the carriage back into the magazine compartment until it stops. 2. Press the START button to cause the autoloader to move a cartridge from the magazine into the drive. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 15 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Removing Cartridges From the Magazine Using the Cartridge Locking Bar For operations that require multiple cartridges (such as large backups), the autoloader loads cartridges from the magazine sequentially by slot number. Unless you specify a slot using the POSITION button, the autoloader loads from slot 1, followed by slot 2, followed by slot 3, and so on. If a slot is empty, the autoloader moves on to the next slot. Loading a Cartridge From a Specified Slot To make the autoloader load a cartridge from a specified slot in the cartridge magazine, do the following: 1. Press the POSITION button until the cartridge position indicator indicates that slot number. 2. Then press the START button. Typical and Maximum Load Times The ACL has the following typical and maximum load times: • • Typical load time: 40 seconds Maximum load time: 200 seconds The load time is the elapsed time from the moment you press START on the ACL front panel until the drive is READY. The maximum load time includes time used by cleaning cycles and retries caused by unsuccessful load operations. Removing Cartridges From the Magazine Using the Cartridge Locking Bar Each slot in the cartridge magazine features a white cartridge locking bar that holds the cartridge in place once it has been inserted in the slot (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-11). • • To release a single cartridge from the magazine, press the locking bar for that cartridge and pull out the cartridge. To release all cartridges from the magazine, press the lock release button on the top of the magazine. This unlocks all the cartridge locking bars in the magazine. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 16 Setting the File-Protect Switch Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Setting the File-Protect Switch The file-protect switch on top of the cartridge magazine works in the same way as the file-protect thumbwheel on each cartridge tape. However, the file-protect switch prevents writing data on all the cartridges loaded in a magazine. Figure 4-6 shows how to set the file-protect switch. Figure 4-6. Setting the File-Protect Switch on the Cartridge Magazine Top View of ACL Cartridge Magazine FILE PROTECT File-Protect Switch Handle Protected Position Writing Disabled Lock Release Button Unprotected Position Writing Enabled VST020.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 17 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Selecting the Operating Mode Selecting the Operating Mode The operating mode controls how cartridges are loaded into the tape drive from the ACL cartridge magazine. The ACL can be set to operate in three modes: manual, auto, and system. Caution. NonStop Himalaya systems support only the auto mode. Do not change the operating mode. If the ACL is not in auto mode, system utilities such as BACKUP might operate unpredictably. Status indicator LEDs on the ACL control panel indicate the current operating mode. Before using the ACL, always make sure the tape drive is in the auto mode. If the mode is not auto, press the MODE SEL button to change the operating mode to auto. Under normal operating conditions, it shouldn’t be necessary to use the MODE SEL button. In the auto mode, cartridges are selected and loaded sequentially. When the ACL receives a load command from the system, the ACL loads either the topmost cartridge in the magazine or the cartridge specified on the cartridge position indicator. When the ACL receives an unload command, the ACL unloads the current cartridge and automatically loads the next cartridge. Rewinding and Unloading Cartridges Unloading a cartridge tape means ejecting it from the tape drive. The drive must be powered on to unload a cartridge. In the auto mode, the ACL unloads cartridges automatically when it receives an unload command from the system. If you interrupt the system and unload a cartridge using the ACL control panel, the message panel informs you that the auto mode was interrupted. Use the following procedure to unload a cartridge from the drive and return it to the ACL cartridge magazine using the ACL control panel buttons: 1. Press the RESET button. The message panel shows NT RDYU or NT RDYF. These are the NOT READY drive states. See NOT READY States on page 4-30 for more information. 2. Press the UNLOAD button to eject the cartridge from the drive. If the tape needs rewinding, the drive automatically begins rewinding the tape and the REWINDNG message appears on the message panel. If the tape position is at EOT, the 5190 tape drive takes approximately 60 seconds to rewind the tape and unload the cartridge. The 5194 tape drive could take 1 second or less, because EOT and BOT are located at the same position. During unloading, the UNLOADNG message appears on the message panel. When the tape is unloaded, the AUTO MODE WAS INTERRUPTED message appears. 3. Press RESET to clear the message. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 18 Rewinding a Tape to BOT Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Cartridges That Do Not Unload When a cartridge cannot be unloaded successfully, the message panel displays an error code or message. If this happens, press RESET and then UNLOAD. When the drive has recovered from the error state, the cartridge is ejected from the drive. If power is removed from the drive while a tape is being read and power cannot be restored, the cartridge must be removed by a trained service provider. Caution. Do not pull a cartridge out of the drive if it is stuck. Doing so could damage the tape or the tape-reading mechanism. Typical and Maximum Unload Times The ACL has the following typical and maximum unload times: • • • Typical unload time: 115 seconds Typical unload time with cleaning cycle: 230 seconds Maximum unload time with cleaning cycle: 720 seconds The unload or reload time is the elapsed time from the moment you press UNLOAD on the ACL front panel to the moment the drive is READY. These times include the typical rewind times of up to 60 seconds for the 5190 tape drive and anywhere from a maximum of 120 seconds to 1 second for the 5194 tape drive (depending on the type of tape and tape position). The maximum unload or reload time includes the time it takes for cleaning cycles and retries caused by unsuccessful load operations. Rewinding a Tape to BOT The tape position LEDs on the ACL control panel indicate whether a tape needs to be rewound. The 5190 and 5194 tape drives automatically rewind the tape before unloading a cartridge. Typically an application program sends a command to rewind and unload the tape cartridge at the end of a job. However, at times, you might need to rewind a tape manually. Use the following procedure to rewind a cartridge tape without unloading the cartridge. The procedure assumes that a cartridge is loaded in the drive and that the tape position is past BOT. To rewind and unload a cartridge, see Unloading Cartridges on page 4-25. 1. Press the RESET button. The message panel shows NT RDYU or NT RDYF. 2. Press the START button. During rewinding, the message panel shows REWINDNG. 3. If you receive an error message or check code, see Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes on page 4-31. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 19 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Unlocking the ACL Door When Power Is Removed Unlocking the ACL Door When Power Is Removed During normal operation, the ACL magazine door locks when a cartridge tape is loaded into the drive. The door cannot be opened unless you unload the cartridge and reset the drive using the RESET button. If power is removed while the DOOR LOCK status indicator LED is lit, the ACL magazine door remains locked to protect the data stored on cartridges in the drive and the cartridge magazine. To unlock the door, reapply power to the module and unload the tape. If power cannot be reapplied, use the following procedure to defeat the door lock mechanism and remove the cartridge magazine. 1. Make sure that the AC power switch at the rear of the tape drive CRU is set to the OFF (0) position. 2. Remove the module bezel by grasping the side handles and pulling the bezel straight off the face of the module. 3. Use a small slotted screwdriver to press down on the door release lever, which is located on the right-hand side of the ACL near the magazine door release button. An opening in the module housing provides access to the door release lever (see Figure 4-7). Caution. After removing the cartridge magazine from an ACL with the power off, do not attempt to remove a cartridge that is loaded in the drive. This can be done only by a trained service provider. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 20 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Unlocking the ACL Door When Power Is Removed Figure 4-7. Unlocking the ACL Door With the Door Release Lever Screwdriver Front of Module VST031.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 21 Operating a Tape Drive Without an ACL Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Operating a Tape Drive Without an ACL If your 5190 and 5194 tape drive CRUs do not have an automatic cartridge loader (ACL), you use the drive front-panel controls to operate it. The following paragraphs describe how to operate a tape drive CRU that does not have an ACL. If the tape drive you want to use has an ACL, see Operating a Tape Drive With an ACL on page 4-5. This subsection includes the following topics: Topic Page Controls on the Drive Front Panel 4-22 Loading Cartridges 4-24 Unloading Cartridges 4-25 Rewinding a Tape 4-26 Controls on the Drive Front Panel Figure 4-8 shows the front panel of the 5190 and 5194 tape drive CRUs. Figure 4-8. 5190 and 5194 Tape Drive CRU Front Panel Cartridge Entry Slot BOT Status Indicator LEDs EOT ATTN . SEL . Tape Position LEDs Message Panel COMP. SHIFT TEST START UNLOAD RESET Operator Buttons VST014.vsd Cartridge Entry Slot The cartridge entry slot on the drive front panel accepts cartridge tapes for loading into the tape drive. A hinged door covers the slot to prevent dust from accumulating inside the drive. The door lifts up and back when a cartridge is inserted or ejected. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 22 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Controls on the Drive Front Panel Operator Buttons The drive front panel has five operator buttons: SHIFT, TEST, START, UNLOAD, and RESET. These buttons let you load cartridges, unload cartridges, and rewind tape. Confirmation messages appear on the message panel after you press a button. Table 4-4 on page 4-9 shows common operations performed with these buttons. Specific operations are described later in this section. Note. Normal operation does not require use of the SHIFT and TEST operator buttons, which are reserved for factory diagnostics. You can perform operator diagnostics using TMDS, COUP, PUP, or SCF commands; see Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) on page 3-45 or Starting and Testing the Tape Drives (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) on page 3-46. Message Panel The message panel on the drive front panel can display up to eight alphanumeric characters or symbols. These combine to form status messages. For examples of status messages, see Understanding Operator Messages on page 4-28. Status Indicator LEDs Three LEDs located to the left of the message panel (ATTN, SEL, and COMP) indicate operating conditions. Table 4-6 summarizes their functions. Table 4-6. 5190 and 5194 Tape Drive CRU Front-Panel Status Indicator LEDs LED Function ATTN (Attention) Not used (always unlit) SEL (Selected) Flashes on and off when the drive formatter is polling the drive COMP (Compression) Lights when the drive reads or writes compressed data For more information on compression and the COMP (compression) LED, see Controlling Data Compression (5190 Tape Drive) on page 4-44. Tape Position LEDs Seven amber LEDs form a horizontal line at the top of the tape drive front panel and indicate the tape position. The BOT (beginning-of-tape) LED lights when the tape is completely rewound. As tape moves through the drive, neighboring LEDs to the right light sequentially to indicate the tape position. For a 5190 tape drive, all seven LEDs are lit when the drive senses the end-of-tape (EOT) position. When all seven LEDs are lit on a 5194 tape drive, the tape is near the end of the reel. At this point, the 5194 tape drive reverses and continues writing 18-track data back to the physical beginning of the tape. When the 5194 tape drive is at EOT, the tape is 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 23 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Loading Cartridges also back at the physical beginning of the tape. When the 5194 reaches EOT only the EOT LED remains lit. A blinking tape position LED indicates that the tape is moving. For a detailed description of how the tape position LEDs function, see Tape Position LEDs on page 4-7. Loading Cartridges Loading a cartridge tape into a 5190 or 5194 tape drive is similar to loading a cassette into a videocassette recorder. After the cartridge is inserted, the drive automatically picks up the leader block and threads the tape around the tape path. Before loading a cartridge, do the following: 1. Wipe the cartridge, if necessary, with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth to avoid introducing dirt into the drive. 2. Inspect the cartridge for damage to the case, the leader block, the leader block latch, or the file-protect thumbwheel. See Using Damaged Cartridges on page 4-4 and refer to Figure 1-2 on page 1-4. 3. Make sure the leader block is firmly lodged under the lip of the cartridge housing. Loose leader blocks can cause loading errors. 4. Check the setting of the file-protect thumbwheel (see Figure 4-1 on page 4-3). To load the cartridge, grasp it with the label side up and the leader block edge pointing away from you (see Figure 4-9). Insert the cartridge directly into the cartridge entry slot until it stops. The drive-loading mechanism seats the cartridge, and the message LOADING appears on the message panel. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 24 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Unloading Cartridges Figure 4-9. Loading a Cartridge Tape Into a Tape Drive Without an ACL VST018.vsd Unloading Cartridges The tape drive must be powered on to unload a cartridge tape. Normally, the cartridge is unloaded by the unload command from the system. If the tape is positioned at EOT, a 5190 tape drive takes approximately 60 seconds to rewind the tape and unload the cartridge and a 5194 tape drive takes approximately 1 second or less. To unload a cartridge using the drive front-panel controls, use the following procedure: 1. Press the RESET button. The message panel shows NT RDYU or NT RDYF. These are the NOT READY drive states. See NOT READY States on page 4-30 for more information. 2. Press the UNLOAD button to eject the cartridge. During unloading, the UNLOADNG message appears on the message panel. If the tape needs rewinding, the drive automatically begins rewinding the tape and the REWINDNG message appears. When the tape is unloaded, the AUTO MODE WAS INTERRUPTED message appears. 3. Press RESET to clear the message. When a cartridge cannot be unloaded successfully, the message panel returns an error code or message. If this happens, press RESET and then UNLOAD. When the drive has recovered from the error state, the cartridge is ejected. If power is removed from 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 25 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Rewinding a Tape the drive while a tape is being read and power cannot be restored, the cartridge must be removed by a trained service provider. Caution. Do not pull a cartridge out of the drive if it's stuck. Doing so could damage the tape or the tape-reading mechanism. Rewinding a Tape The tape drive automatically rewinds the tape before unloading a cartridge. Typically an application program sends commands to rewind the tape and unload the cartridge at the end of a job. However, occasionally you might need to rewind and unload a tape manually. The following procedures assume that a cartridge is loaded in the tape drive and that the tape position is past BOT. Rewinding Tape Without Unloading the Cartridge Use this procedure to rewind a cartridge tape without unloading: 1. Press the RESET button. The message panel shows NT RDYU or NT RDYF. 2. Press the START button. During rewinding, the message panel shows REWINDNG. 3. If you receive an error message, see Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes on page 4-31. Rewinding Tape and Unloading the Cartridge Use this procedure to rewind and unload a cartridge tape: 1. Press the RESET button. The message panel shows NT RDYU or NT RDYF. 2. Press the UNLOAD button to eject the cartridge. During unloading, the message UNLOADNG appears on the message panel. If the tape needs rewinding, the drive automatically begins rewinding the tape and the message REWINDNG appears on the message panel. It should take no more than two minutes to rewind. 3. If you receive an error message, see Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes on page 4-31. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 26 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Cleaning a Tape Drive Cleaning a Tape Drive Cartridge tape drives require cleaning on a regular basis to ensure trouble-free operation. Cleaning cartridges provide a safe, convenient way to clean a drive. A cleaning cartridge looks like a regular tape cartridge but contains a cleaning ribbon instead of magnetic tape. Most cleaning cartridges are clearly marked with the number of cleaning cycles they provide. Use only cartridges from a reputable manufacturer that provide 100 cleaning cycles. To prevent problems with reading and writing tape, even if you have a 500-count cleaning cartridge, do not use the cleaning cartridge for more than 100 cleaning cycles. Cleaning a Tape Drive With an ACL When you install a tape drive that has an ACL, you must load a cleaning cartridge into a chamber within the ACL. This self-contained cleaning cartridge automatically cleans the drive after the tape equivalent of 20 cartridges has passed over the drive heads. If you believe more frequent cleaning is necessary, you can use the operator buttons on the ACL control panel to load the cleaning cartridge and clean the drive. Caution. Do not attempt to remove the cleaning cartridge from the cleaning chamber by hand. Doing so could damage the autoloader. See Removing a Cleaning Cartridge From an ACL on page 6-11 and Replacing a Cleaning Cartridge in an ACL on page 6-10. Use this procedure to begin the ACL cleaning cycle: 1. Unload any cartridge currently in the tape drive, and press the RESET button until the message panel displays an asterisk (*). 2. Verify that the ACL is in the auto mode. If it is not, press the MODE SEL button to set the ACL into the auto mode. 3. Press the POSITION button repeatedly until the cartridge position indicator displays the letter C. 4. Press START. The ACL loads the cleaning cartridge and begins the cleaning cycle. The tape position LEDs show the status of the cleaning cycle. When cleaning is finished, the autoloader returns the cleaning cartridge to its storage chamber inside the ACL. Caution. The cleaning cycle lasts about 90 seconds and cannot be interrupted. Do not turn off power to the tape drive during the cleaning cycle. The cleaning tape could become lodged in the drive. A message appears on the ACL message panel when the cleaning cartridge needs to be replaced. To replace the ACL cleaning cartridge, see Replacing a Cleaning Cartridge in an ACL on page 6-10. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 27 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Cleaning a Tape Drive Without an ACL CHK F8 Check Code on an ACL If the ACL message panel displays a CHK F8 check code after the procedure described in Cleaning a Tape Drive With an ACL on page 4-27, it could mean that a cleaning cartridge is not installed in the ACL. Press and hold down the TEST button to view the complete text for the check code. The easiest way to determine whether a cleaning cartridge is installed in an ACL is to unload any cartridge from the drive, remove the cartridge magazine from the ACL, and look inside the ACL. The cleaning cartridge chamber is located at the rear on top. If a cleaning cartridge is not installed, you must install one for normal operation. See Installing the Cleaning Cartridge in the ACL on page 3-44. See also Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes on page 4-31. Cleaning a Tape Drive Without an ACL The 5190 and 5194 tape drives automatically alert an operator when cleaning is required by displaying the following message on the message panel: *CLEAN Even if the tape drive does not prompt you for cleaning, use a cleaning cartridge according to the following schedule: Daily Operating Load Recommended Cleaning Cycle 5 cartridges Once every two weeks 10 cartridges Once a week 50 cartridges Daily Use the following procedure to clean a 5190 or 5194 tape drive that does not have an ACL: 1. Rewind and unload any cartridge currently in the drive (for instructions, see Rewinding a Tape to BOT on page 4-19). 2. Load the cleaning cartridge in the drive. The cleaning process begins automatically and lasts about 90 seconds. When cleaning is finished, the tape rewinds and the cartridge unloads. Caution. The cleaning cycle lasts about 90 seconds and cannot be interrupted. Do not turn off power to the drive during the cleaning cycle. The cleaning tape could become lodged in the drive. Understanding Operator Messages The 5190 and 5194 tape drives generate the same types of operator messages. There are five message types, and messages appear on the message panel in order of priority; that is, high-priority messages appear before low-priority messages. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 28 Understanding Operator Messages Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Table 4-7 describes the message types and shows their priority. Table 4-7. Operator Message Types and Priorities Message Type Priority Indicates Check 1 (High) An error condition—service provider intervention may be required Not Ready 2 The offline state of the drive Fixed 3 The operating state of the drive Host 4 Information from the host system Background 5 (Low) The online state of the drive Table 4-8 lists the most common operator messages (listed by priority). Table 4-8. Common Operator Messages Message Message Type CHK XX Check Hardware error displays a hexadecimal error code (XX). Service provider intervention is required. XXXXXXXX Check Operator error. A hexadecimal error code or a number of characters is displayed. NT RDYU Not Ready The tape drive is not ready. Writing is enabled. NT RDYF Not Ready The tape drive is not ready. Writing is inhibited. UNLOADNG Fixed A cartridge is being unloaded. REWINDNG Fixed The tape is being rewound. E.O.T. Fixed The tape drive has reached the end of the tape. CLEANING Fixed The tape drive is using the cleaning cartridge. XXXXXXXX Host An 8-character or 16-character message from the host system is displayed. * Background No cartridge is loaded. * CLEAN Background No cartridge is loaded. Cleaning is required. (No ACL is attached to the drive.) BOT RDYU Background The tape position is BOT. A cartridge is loaded. Writing is enabled. BOT RDYF Background The tape position is BOT. A cartridge is loaded. Writing is inhibited. READY U Background A cartridge is loaded. Writing is enabled. READY F Background A cartridge is loaded. Writing is inhibited. NO LABEL Background A cartridge is loaded. The cartridge has no tape label. Meaning 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 29 READY States Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Table 4-9 shows the two types of error messages that can be displayed on the message panel. (See Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes on page 4-31.) Table 4-9. Error Messages and Check Codes Message Message Type CHK XX Check Hardware error displays a hexadecimal error code (XX). Service provider intervention is required. XXXXXXXX Check Error message. A hexadecimal error code or a number of characters (XXXXXXXX) is displayed. Meaning READY States The tape drive cannot read data from or write data to a tape cartridge unless it is in one of four READY states. When the drive is in a READY state, the drive is online and ready to start executing commands. To be in a READY state, the drive must have a cartridge loaded and the threader arm must pick up the leader block. There are four READY states: State Description BOT RDYU The tape position is BOT. An unprotected cartridge is loaded. The drive can write on the tape. BOT RDYF The tape position is BOT. A file-protected cartridge is loaded. The drive cannot write on the tape. READY U An unprotected cartridge is loaded. The drive can write on the tape. READY F A file-protected cartridge is loaded. The drive cannot write on the tape. Making a Drive READY Unless an error condition is present, inserting a cartridge into a tape drive makes it READY. If the drive has an ACL, you must insert a cartridge in the cartridge magazine and put the magazine into the magazine compartment. When you press the START button, the cartridge tape is loaded into the drive and the drive should change to the READY state. NOT READY States There are two NOT READY states: State Description NT RDYU An unprotected cartridge is loaded. The drive is offline. NT RDYF A file-protected cartridge is loaded. The drive is offline. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 30 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes Making a Drive NOT READY To change a tape drive to a NOT READY state, press the RESET button. Responding to Error Messages and Check Codes Error messages and check codes can appear in the following formats: • CHK XX, where XX represents a hexadecimal error code For example, CHK 98 • XXXXXXXX, which can represent any characters or a hexadecimal code For example, CTRL ERR FRU = E024 These error messages and check codes indicate a hardware or software problem that might require CRU replacement. If you receive an error message or check code, take the following steps: 1. Write down the complete message. To view the complete message, press and hold down the TEST button to scroll the message from right to left across the message panel. 2. Press the RESET button twice to clear the message. 3. Retry the operation (usually by pressing the START button). 4. If the message persists, stop all applications using the tape drive, bring down the drive, and cycle power to the drive. 5. If cycling power to the drive does not clear the message, use TMDS diagnostics (for NonStop Himalaya K-series servers) or use SCF commands (for NonStop Himalaya S-series servers) to isolate the problem in the tape drive CRU or its controller. 6. If you believe the drive has a malfunction, remove the tape drive CRU from the tape drive module (see Replacing a 5190 or 5194 Tape Drive CRU on page 6-5). If you believe the 3216 controller logic board or BIC has a malfunction, replace it and contact your service provider for instructions about shipping the malfunctioning hardware back to Compaq. Be sure to include a description of the problem, the operations that preceded the problem, and any messages you observed. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 31 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using PUP With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Using PUP With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) The Peripheral Utility Program (PUP) performs various maintenance operations on cartridge tape drives and other peripheral devices. Certain PUP commands, including the UP and DOWN commands, can be executed only by super-group users (user ID 255,n). See the Guardian User’s Guide for additional information about user IDs. For additional information on PUP, see the Peripheral Utility Program (PUP) Reference Manual. Checking the Status of a Cartridge Tape Drive You can use the PUP LISTDEV command to check the status of a tape drive or other peripheral attached to your system. This command is useful for checking the UP or DOWN state of a tape drive. The tape drive appears as a type 4, subtype 9 device in a PUP LISTDEV display, regardless of the drive model installed. Examples To check the status of a tape drive named $TAPE1, enter the following command: > PUP LISTDEV $TAPE1 LDEV 71 NAME STATE PPIN PC,C,%C,%U $TAPE1 24 1,0,13, 5 BPIN BC,C,%C,%U 24 D 0,0,13, 5 T S RSIZ 4 9 2048 To check the status of all tape drives configured on your system, enter the following command: > PUP LISTDEV TAPE LDEV 71 72 NAME $TAPE1 $TAPE2 STATE PPIN PC,C,%C,%U D 24 25 1,0,13, 5 1,0 13, 4 BPIN BC,C,%C,%U 24 25 D 0,0,13, 5 0,0 13, 4 T S RSIZ 4 4 9 9 2048 2048 You can also use the TAPECOM STATUS command and the MEDIACOM STATUS TAPEDRIVE command to check the status of tape drives on your system. For information about TAPECOM, see the Guardian Disk and Tape Utilities Reference Manual. For information about MEDIACOM, see the DSM/Tape Catalog Operator Interface (MEDIACOM) Manual. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 32 Bringing Up a Cartridge Tape Drive Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Bringing Up a Cartridge Tape Drive If a tape drive is down, the PUP UP command makes the drive accessible to user processes. You bring up a tape drive during installation and any time you want to restore the device to an operational state after placing it in the DOWN state. You must be a super-group user to use the PUP UP command. Example To bring up (place back in operation) the tape drive named $TAPE1, enter the following command: > PUP UP $TAPE1 To check that $TAPE1 is actually up, enter the following command: > PUP LISTDEV $TAPE1 LDEV 16 • • • NAME $TAPE1 STATE PPIN PC,C,%C,%U + 21 1,0,12, 5 BPIN BC,C,%C,%U 21 D 0,0,12, 5 T S RSIZ 4 9 2048 A plus sign (+) in the STATE column indicates that the tape drive was started dynamically using COUP. A blank in the STATE column of the PUP LISTDEV display indicates the tape drive is in the UP state. For a list of all the possible device states, see the Peripheral Utility Program (PUP) Reference Manual. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 33 Bringing Down a Cartridge Tape Drive Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Bringing Down a Cartridge Tape Drive The PUP DOWN command makes a tape drive inaccessible to user processes. Successful completion of the DOWN command stops the device. You bring down a tape drive when you need to: • • Upgrade or perform maintenance on the drive Physically remove the drive from the system (but the system is not yet reconfigured) You must be a super-group user to execute the PUP DOWN command. Remember to stop all processes using the tape drive before you bring down the drive. If a cartridge is loaded in the drive when you issue the DOWN command, it is unloaded before the drive is brought down. Example To bring down (remove from operation) the tape drive named $TAPE1, enter the following command: > PUP DOWN $TAPE1 To check to make sure that $TAPE1 is actually down, enter the following command: > PUP LISTDEV $TAPE1 LDEV 71 • • • NAME $TAPE1 STATE PPIN PC,C,%C,%U D 12 0,0,13, BPIN BC,C,%C,%U 4 12 1,0,13, D 4 T S RSIZ 4 9 2048 A letter D in the STATE column of the PUP LISTDEV display indicates the tape drive is in the DOWN state. A blank in the STATE column of the PUP LISTDEV display indicates the tape drive is in the UP state. For a list of all the possible device states, see the Peripheral Utility Program (PUP) Reference Manual. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 34 Using SCF With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using SCF With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) The Subsystem Control Facility (SCF) performs maintenance operations on cartridge tape drives as well as other peripheral devices. For additional information on using SCF with cartridge tape drives, see the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. This subsection describes how to use SCF commands to check the status of tape drives, start tape drives, and stop access to tape drives. Checking the Status of a Cartridge Tape Drive You use the SCF STATUS command to check the status of a tape drive or other peripheral device attached to your system. This command is useful for checking the current state of a tape drive. Examples To check the status of a tape drive named $TAPE1, enter the following command: ->STATUS TAPE $TAPE1 STORAGE - Status TAPE \TEST.$TAPE1 LDev State Primary Backup PID PID 134 STARTED 0,297 1,316 DeviceStatus NOT READY This report shows that the tape drive $TAPE1 is: • • • In a STARTED state Using processor 0 as the primary processor Using processor 1 as the backup processor 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 35 Checking the Status of a Cartridge Tape Drive Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL To produce a detailed report of a tape drive’s status, enter the STATUS TAPE, DETAIL command as follows: ->STATUS TAPE $TAPE0, DETAIL STORAGE - Detailed Status TAPE \TEST.$TAPE0 Tape Process Information: LDev State Primary PID 135 STARTED 0,296 Backup PID 1,317 DeviceStatus NOT READY Tape I/O Process Information: Library File....... Program File....... $SYSTEM.SYS32.OTPPROCP Current Settings: ACL................ Checksum Mode...... *Density............ Opens.............. Short Write Mode... Volume Switching... NOT INSTALLED NORMAL I/O 38000 0 ALLOWED, PADDED TRANSPARENT Buffer Level...... *Compression....... Media Type........ *RecSize........... SubType........... REEL ON 36-TRACKS 8192 9 Media Information: Automatic Volume Recognition Labels: VOL1: SANYOA HDR1: D87D040 SANYOA00010001000100000028 000000000000 HDR2: F080000080000 B This report shows $TAPE0 is: • • • • • Logical device 135 In the STARTED state Currently rewinding the tape A 36-track (5194) tape drive Has a subtype of 9 (the type is 4) In addition to the STATUS command, you can also use the SCF INFO TAPE command to display system configuration information such as the current attribute values for a tape drive. For a detailed look at the STATUS and INFO commands, see the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 36 Starting a Cartridge Tape Drive Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Starting a Cartridge Tape Drive You use the SCF START command to start a tape drive. The START command makes a stopped tape process accessible to user processes. When the START command finishes successfully, the tape drive is in the STARTED state. Examples To start tape drive $TAPE0, enter the following command: ->START $TAPE0 To then check the status of $TAPE0, enter the following command: ->STATUS TAPE $TAPE0 STORAGE - Status TAPE \TEST.$TAPE0 LDev State Primary Backup PID PID 134 STARTED 0,297 1,316 DeviceStatus NOT READY Tape drive $TAPE0 is now in the STARTED state. For more on the START command, see the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. Stopping a Cartridge Tape Drive You use the SCF STOP command to stop access to a tape drive in an orderly manner (which means that the tape is stopped after any current activity finishes). When the STOP command finishes, the tape drive is left in a STOPPED state. The tape drive remains configured in the system configuration database. Example To stop access to the tape drive $TAPE1, enter the following command: ->STOP $TAPE1 To then check the status of $TAPE1, enter the following command: ->STATUS TAPE $TAPE1 STORAGE - Status TAPE \TEST.$TAPE1 LDev State Primary Backup PID PID 134 STOPPED 0,297 1,316 DeviceStatus NOT READY Tape drive $TAPE1 is now in the STOPPED state. For more on the STOP command, see the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 37 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using the TSM Package With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) Using the TSM Package With the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) The TSM package is a client/server application that provides troubleshooting, maintenance, and service tools for NonStop Himalaya S-series servers. The tasks you can perform are listed under The TSM Package (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) on page 5-7. For more information about TSM concepts, commands, and dialog boxes and how to perform TSM tape tasks, see the TSM Online User Guide. Using BACKUP and RESTORE With the Modular Tape Subsystem BACKUP and RESTORE are two of the most commonly used utilities for moving files between a NonStop Himalaya server and cartridge tapes. You can use BACKUP to copy disk files to magnetic tape on a regular basis. If one or more disk files are lost or destroyed, you can use RESTORE to replace the lost files from tape. To begin a BACKUP or RESTORE operation when using an ACL, you must first load a cartridge from one of the slots in the cartridge magazine. See Loading the Cartridge Magazine on page 4-15. For operations requiring a single cartridge, the tape drive writes to or reads from the tape, then the ACL unloads the cartridge (unless you specified the NOUNLOAD option of the BACKUP utility) and loads the next cartridge. For BACKUP or RESTORE operations requiring multiple cartridges, the system prompts you to load a new cartridge when it is needed. Prompts appear whether or not the tape drive has an automatic cartridge loader (ACL). If the drive you are using has an ACL, you can bypass these prompts and allow the ACL to load cartridges automatically, as the system needs them, by specifying the NOPROMPT option of BACKUP and RESTORE. See the examples in this subsection. For more information on the BACKUP and RESTORE utilities, refer to the Guardian Disk and Tape Utilities Reference Manual. Backing Up Disk Files to Tape The following example copies all files from the $DISK1.USER2 subvolume to the tape on the tape drive named $TAPE1. 1> BACKUP $TAPE1, $DISK1.USER2.*, LISTALL, NOPROMPT, VERIFYTAPE • • The LISTALL option lists the names of all files copied to tape. The NOPROMPT option instructs BACKUP not to prompt the user before writing to each tape. This option is useful when the backup requires more than one cartridge and the tape drive has an ACL. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 38 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL • Backups Requiring Multiple Cartridge Tapes The VERIFYTAPE options instructs BACKUP to examine the tape for data integrity after each file is written to tape. Using Labeled Tape If you are using labeled tapes, you must use a tape DEFINE in BACKUP and RESTORE commands. A tape DEFINE specifies information about a tape file, such as the label type, tape density, and expiration date of the data on the tape. The following example specifies a CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE named “=BACK.” The BACKUP command copies all the files on the $DATA volume to the tape =BACK. 1> ADD DEFINE =BACK, CLASS TAPECATALOG, LABELS BACKUP,& 1> &USE OUT, CATALOG OFF 2> BACKUP =BACK, $DATA.*.*, LISTALL, NOPROMPT • • The LISTALL option lists the names of all files copied to tape. The NOPROMPT option instructs BACKUP not to prompt the user before beginning to write on each tape, but to begin when it detects the tape drive is ready. For more information about labeled-tape processing, see Using Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes on NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers on page 4-42. For more information on tape DEFINEs, see the following manuals: • • • Guardian User’s Guide Guardian Disk and Tape Utilities Reference Manual DSM/Tape Catalog User’s Guide Backups Requiring Multiple Cartridge Tapes For backups that require more than one cartridge tape, the ACL starts with the cartridge you load in the drive to begin the backup process. (See Loading the Cartridge Magazine on page 4-15.) If the BACKUP command includes the NOPROMPT option, the ACL loads additional tapes sequentially without prompting the operator. For example, if you load the cartridge from slot 1 into the drive and issue a BACKUP command that requires three cartridges, the ACL uses the cartridges in slots 1, 2, and 3. The drive unloads the third cartridge when BACKUP is finished and then loads the next cartridge. Cartridges cannot be loaded in random slot order unless you load them manually using the buttons on the ACL front panel. Sequential loading does not progress beyond the cartridge in slot 7. If a BACKUP operation requires additional cartridges, you must remove the cartridges already written, insert another magazine full of cartridges, and load a new cartridge. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 39 Restoring Tape Files to Disk Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Restoring Tape Files to Disk Use the RESTORE utility to copy files from magnetic tape to disk. The following example restores the contents of the tape on tape drive $TAPE to a specified subvolume on $DISK1 located within the same system. 1> RESTORE $TAPE, $DISK1.*.*, LISTALL, NOPROMPT, MYID, TAPEDATE • • • • The LISTALL option lists the names of the disk files that are copied successfully from tape. The NOPROMPT option instructs RESTORE not to prompt the user before beginning to read each tape, but to begin when it detects the tape drive is ready. The MYID option sets the owner ID of all of the files that are being restored to that of the user who is running RESTORE. The TAPEDATE option determines the date used for the last modification and last open timestamps of the files that are being restored. Viewing the Contents of a Tape The RESTORE utility also lets you view the contents of a labeled or unlabeled cartridge tape before restoring its files to disk. The following example instructs the RESTORE utility to verify the tape on drive $TAPE0, list the files without writing the tape to disk, and leave the tape online so that you can start a RESTORE process without remounting the tape: 1> RESTORE $TAPE0, *.*.*, VERIFYTAPE, LISTONLY, NOUNLOAD Using the BLOCKSIZE Option You can use larger BLOCKSIZE attribute values on systems that have installed a D30 or later version of the Restore utility. Larger BLOCKSIZE values can improve BACKUP performance by increasing the size of data records written to tape. The BLOCKSIZE attribute specifies the number of 1024-byte increments (blocks) in each record. The following table lists BLOCKSIZE values for 5190 or 5194 tape drives using MFCs, 3216 controllers, or PMF CRUs. For 5190 or 5194 Tape Drives Using BLOCKSIZE Values MFCs 2 and 4 through 28 in increments of 4 3216 controllers as large as 52 PMF CRUs or IOMF CRUs 2 and 4 through 52 in increments of 4 6760 ServerNet/DA with F-PIC 2 and 4 through 52 in increments of 4 6760 ServerNet/DA with S-PIC 2 and 4 through 52 in increments of 4 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 40 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using the NOUNLOAD Option The default BLOCKSIZE is 8 (8192 bytes). When using larger block sizes, make sure all tape subsystems that will read the tape support the BLOCKSIZE you specified. Tape subsystems with lower BLOCKSIZE limits cannot read larger block sizes. Before using BLOCKSIZE values larger than 28, consider this information: • • • • Only K10000 and K20000 servers with 3216 tape controllers support BLOCKSIZE values larger than 28. The 3216 controller and MFC do not support BLOCKSIZE values larger than 28. A tape that was backed up with a BLOCKSIZE larger than 28 can be restored only on a system using a D30 or later version of RESTORE with a tape subsystems that supports the larger block transfers. Expand networks do not support BLOCKSIZE values larger than 28. For more information about the BLOCKSIZE attribute, refer to the Guardian Disk and Tape Utilities Reference Manual. Using the NOUNLOAD Option The NOUNLOAD option directs the BACKUP utility to rewind the final tape and leave it online in the tape drive when the BACKUP process is completed. If you don’t specify the NOUNLOAD option in the BACKUP command, the ACL returns the last cartridge tape to its slot when the drive is finished writing to the tape. The ACL then automatically loads the next cartridge. 1> BACKUP $TAPE1, $MYDISK.MYVOL.*, NOPROMPT, NOUNLOAD TMF Support The Transaction Management Facility (TMF) subsystem, which is part of the Compaq NonStop Transaction Manager/MP (TM/MP) product, protects databases in online transaction processing environments. To provide this service, the TMF subsystem manages database transactions, keeps track of database activity through audit trails, and supports online dumps. After the TMF subsystem is running, you can use the TMFCOM command interface to issue the DUMP FILES command, which initiates an online dump. The following observations concern the TMF subsystem and online dumps: • • • TMF tape processing of online dumps requires labeled tapes (see Using Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes on NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers on page 4-42). If you are using a TMF scratch tape for your online dump, verify that the tape is not write-protected. See Setting the File-Protect Thumbwheel on page 4-3. The TMF subsystem has its own recovery mechanisms for audited files. However, you might want to use the BACKUP and RESTORE utilities (see Using BACKUP 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 41 Using Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes on NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL and RESTORE With the Modular Tape Subsystem on page 4-38) to perform the following tasks: • ° ° ° Transport audited files to another system Archive files and retrieve files that are used infrequently Keep old versions of files Online dumps can be taken while transactions are being processed by database applications; that is, while the TMF subsystem is running. For more information on the TMF subsystem and online dumps, refer to the following manuals: • • • TM/MP Configuration and Planning Guide TM/MP Operations and Recovery Guide TM/MP Reference Manual Using Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes on NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers You should use labeled tapes with the modular tape subsystem because they can be cataloged and offer security features for protecting data. For an introduction to labeled and unlabeled tapes, see Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes on page 1-5. Using the MEDIACOM Utility for Labeled-Tape Operations MEDIACOM is the utility for managing labeled-tape operations. MEDIACOM replaces TAPECOM and provides the operator interface to the Distributed Systems Management/Tape Catalog (DSM/TC). Use MEDIACOM commands to do the following: • • • • Label new tapes and catalog them Handle tape mount requests Manage the use of uncataloged tapes Create scratch tapes Refer to the DSM/Tape Catalog Operator Interface (MEDIACOM) Manual for more information about using MEDIACOM. How to Enable Labeled-Tape Processing To use MEDIACOM, you must enable labeled-tape processing on your system. This is done by specifying the following entry in the ALLPROCESSORS paragraph of the CONFTEXT configuration file: TAPE_LABEL_PROCESSING ENABLED; This entry routes all tape requests through the tape server process, $ZSVR. If you do not specify this entry, SYSGENR assumes that labeled-tape processing is disabled. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 42 Where to Get More Information About Labeled-Tape Processing Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL With labeled-tape processing enabled, you can use both labeled and unlabeled tapes. With labeled-tape processing disabled, you can use only unlabeled tapes. Where to Get More Information About Labeled-Tape Processing The following table tells you where to get more information on labeled tapes, labeledtape processing, tape operator tasks, and utilities for managing tape operations: For more information about... Read... Enabling labeled-tape processing Modifying the ALLPROCESSORS Paragraph for Labeled-Tape Processing on page 2-18 Managing labeled-tape processing Guardian User’s Guide MEDIACOM and tape-label formats DSM/Tape Catalog Operator Interface (MEDIACOM) Manual BACKUP utility, RESTORE utility, and TAPECOM utility Guardian Disk and Tape Utilities Reference Manual File Utility Program (FUP) File Utility Program (FUP) Reference Manual Preparing a Tape Drive for Online Dumps (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) The online dump process copies specified database tables and files from disk volumes to a tape drive that has been placed online. All the tables and files in databases used by your applications should be protected regularly by online dumps. You must take the following steps before performing an online dump: 1. Verify that the tape drive has been configured. See Section 2, Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem. 2. Verify that the tape drive you are dumping to has been placed online and that a path to the controller exists. See Bringing the Tape Drives Online After Installation on page 3-39. 3. Label the tapes you are using for the online dump. See Using Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes on NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers on page 4-42. Using Labeled and Unlabeled Tapes on NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers Initially, labeled-tape processing is disabled in the ALLPROCESSORS paragraph of the CONFTEXT configuration file. With labeled-tape processing disabled, you can use only unlabeled tapes. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 43 How to Change Labeled-Tape Processing Configuration Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL How to Change Labeled-Tape Processing Configuration With labeled-tape processing enabled, you can use both labeled and unlabeled tapes. You can override the CONFTEXT entry by using SCF to alter the LABELTAPE attribute. First stop the drive, then use the SCF ALTER command; for example: ->ALTER TAPE $TAPE0, LABELTAPE ON Where to Get More Information About Labeled-Tape Processing The following table tells you where to get more information on labeled tapes, labeledtape processing, tape operator tasks, and utilities for managing tape operations: For more information about... Read... Managing labeled-tape processing Guardian User’s Guide BACKUP utility, RESTORE utility, and TAPECOM utility Guardian Disk and Tape Utilities Reference Manual File Utility Program (FUP) File Utility Program (FUP) Reference Manual MEDIACOM and tape-label formats DSM/Tape Catalog Operator Interface (MEDIACOM) Manual Enabling labeled-tape processing SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem Controlling Data Compression (5190 Tape Drive) Improved Data Recording Capability (IDRC) data compression is a standard feature on the 5190 and 5194 tape drives. The 5190 drive writes uncompressed data (unless compression mode is on). The 5194 tape drive always has data compression mode on. When activated for the 5190 drive, compression allows the drive to store two or more times as much data on a cartridge tape. However, the amount of compression varies with the data being written. See Table 1-3 on page 1-6. The system does not detect any difference in writing or reading compressed or uncompressed data. A disk file of 200 kilobytes written to tape in compressed mode is still a 200-kilobyte file on the tape, but it consumes less tape than the same file written with uncompressed data. The Compression LED The COMP (compression) LED on the tape drive or ACL front panel indicates when the drive is processing compressed data. The COMP LED lights when the drive writes compressed data to tape or when the drive reads compressed data to the tape drive buffer. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 44 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using TMDS to Check the Compression Mode Status (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) The COMP LED becomes unlit when the drive reads or writes uncompressed data or tape marks (also referred to as file marks). The LED remains unlit during loading, unloading, and rewinding. During normal operation, prefetching of data causes the COMP LED to flash on and off more frequently when the drive reads data than when it writes data. Using TMDS to Check the Compression Mode Status (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) To determine the compression mode of the last write operation, use the TMDS STATUS command. To use this command for a tape drive named $TAPE1, enter: >TMDS TAPE TAPE>STATUS $TAPE1 The information displayed for $TAPE1 includes the compression mode of the drive. For an example of the display, see The STATUS Command on page 5-5. The TMDS STATUS command does not show the current compression mode of the drive; rather, it shows the compression mode of the last write operation. The display reflects changes in the systemwide compression default setting only after a write operation. To see the current compression mode with TMDS, you can use the TMDS MONITOR command. For more information, see the TAPE subsystem information in the TMDS Reference Manual. You can determine the system default specification for compression by using the MEDIACOM INFO MEDIADEFS command as described in Steps 1 and 2 of Using MEDIACOM to Set the Systemwide Compression Default Setting on page 4-49. Methods for Controlling Compression Table 4-10 lists the ways to control compression for the 5190 drive. Table 4-10. Methods for Controlling Compression on a 5190 Tape Drive (page 1 of 2) Method Description PERIPHERALS paragraph modifier (K-series only) This is a convenient way of permanently setting the compression mode for a 5190 tape drive if you are not using MEDIACOM. (The MEDIACOM systemwide default setting overrides the PERIPHERALS paragraph setting.) 4-46 COUP (K-series only) If there is no systemwide default setting, you can use the COUP compression device attribute to enable or disable compression for a 5190 tape drive you are configuring. (The MEDIACOM systemwide default setting overrides the COUP setting.) 4-47 MEDIACOM The MEDIACOM ALTER MEDIADEFS command sets a systemwide compression default setting. 4-49 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 45 Page Specifying a Compression Modifier in the PERIPHERALS Paragraph (NonStop Himalaya Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Table 4-10. Methods for Controlling Compression on a 5190 Tape Drive (page 2 of 2) Method Description Page CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE command You can use the CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE to specify the compression default setting for one job. (This setting overrides the current systemwide default setting.) 4-50 SETMODE 162 procedure call You can use the Guardian SETMODE 162 procedure call to specify the compression mode for one write command. (This setting overrides the current systemwide default setting.) 4-52 SCF (NonStop Himalaya S-series only) You set compression mode on or off using the SCF ADD and ALTER TAPE command. However, the MEDIACOM systemwide default setting overrides this setting. 4-52 Specifying a Compression Modifier in the PERIPHERALS Paragraph (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) When you use the PERIPHERALS paragraph of the CONFTEXT file to control compression (shown in the following example), the compression mode can be changed by: • • • Reconfiguring and reloading the system Using MEDIACOM to set a systemwide default setting Using the SETMODE 162 procedure call for a specific job If you want to use a consistent systemwide compression default setting for the 5190 tape drive but you do not use MEDIACOM, you can specify a compression modifier for that drive in the PERIPHERALS paragraph. The modifiers that control compression are COMPRESSION and NOCOMPRESSION. For example, to set compression mode on for the tape drive $BACKUP: !Device !Name ! $BACKUP Controller / Unit Number Macro Modifiers TAPEA.5 5190 COMPRESSION; It is not necessary to specify a compression modifier in the PERIPHERALS paragraph if you set a systemwide default setting using the MEDIACOM ALTER MEDIADEFS command. The MEDIACOM default setting overrides this modifier. For more information on tape-specific CONFTEXT file entries, see Configuring the Modular Tape Subsystem by Modifying the CONFTEXT File on page 2-13. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 46 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using COUP to Set Compression Mode (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Using COUP to Set Compression Mode (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) If you use COUP to add a 5190 tape drive to your system configuration, you can enable or disable compression for the 5190 tape drive by specifying the COMPRESSION or NOCOMPRESSION device attribute before adding the device to your system. To change the compression mode of a 5190 tape drive using COUP, you must stop the drive, use the COUP ALTER command to change the drive attributes, and then restart the drive using the COUP START command. You must be a member of the super group (user ID 255,n) to use the COUP START, STOP, and ALTER commands. The systemwide default compression setting set by MEDIACOM takes priority over the COUP compression attribute. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 47 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using COUP to Set Compression Mode (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Use the following procedure to set the compression mode of a 5190 tape drive using COUP: 1. Stop all processes that are using the tape drive, and bring down the tape drive using the PUP DOWN command. See Bringing Down a Cartridge Tape Drive on page 4-34. 2. Use COUP commands to determine the current compression attribute of the drive, stop the drive, alter the compression attribute of the drive, and restart the drive. The following example sets compression on for a 5190 tape drive named $TAPE1. (Entries shown in boldface show compression status before and after the ALTER command was issued.) > COUP CONFIGURATION UTILITY PROGRAM - T9023D42 - (15MAR99) COPYRIGHT TANDEM COMPUTERS INCORPORATED 1987-1998 CONFIG $SYSTEM.SYS01.OSCONFIG SYSTEM \TEST 1) ASSUME DEVICE 2) INFO $TAPE1, DETAIL NAME $TAPE1 PRODUCT 5190 CONTROLLERNAME TAPEA COUP FLAGS ( COUPED, STARTED, DOWNED ) TYPE 04 SUBTYPE 09 RSIZE 02048 UNIT 05 HIGHPIN ON PROCESS IMAGE $SYSTEM.SSYS01.ZZPIM000 IOPOBJECT $SYSTEM.SYS01.OTPPROCP IOPLIBRARY DENSITY38000 TAPEMODESTREAM NOCOMPRESSION TAPE^OPENERS 4 3) STOP $TAPE1 4) ALTER $TAPE1, COMPRESSION 5) START $TAPE1 6) INFO DEVICE $TAPE1, DETAIL NAME $TAPE1 PRODUCT 5190 CONTROLLERNAME TAPEA COUP FLAGS ( COUPED, STARTED, DOWNED ) TYPE 04 SUBTYPE 09 RSIZE 02048 UNIT 05 HIGHPIN ON PROCESS IMAGE $SYSTEM.SSYS01.ZZPIM000 IOPOBJECT $SYSTEM.SYS01.OTPPROCP IOPLIBRARY DENSITY38000 TAPEMODESTREAM COMPRESSION TAPE^OPENERS 4 3. Bring up the tape drive using the PUP UP command. See Bringing Up a Cartridge Tape Drive on page 4-33. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 48 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using MEDIACOM to Set the Systemwide Compression Default Setting Using MEDIACOM to Set the Systemwide Compression Default Setting MEDIACOM is the operator interface to the Distributed Systems Management/Tape Catalog (DSM/TC). Using MEDIACOM commands, you can manage the tape catalog (working with either labeled or unlabeled tapes). Super-group users (user ID 255,n) can set the systemwide compression default setting for your system by using the MEDIACOM ALTER MEDIADEFS command. (This command affects only 5190 tape drives; compression is always on for 5194 tape drives.) The compression attribute of the ALTER MEDIADEFS command has two possible settings: COMPRESSION IDRC and COMPRESSION OFF. The default setting is COMPRESSION OFF. When you specify COMPRESSION IDRC, compression is set on for 5190 tape drives. To check and set the systemwide compression default setting: 1. Enter MEDIACOM at the TACL prompt: 20> MEDIACOM MEDIACOM - T6028D30 (31OCT94) Copyright Tandem Computers Incorporated 1993, 1994 MC> 2. Enter INFO MEDIADEFS at the MEDIACOM prompt (MC>) to display the current systemwide setting for compression: MC> INFO MEDIADEFS Support Level Automatic Compression MC> NOCATALOG OFF OFF “Compression OFF” means that by default on this system, compression is not used during a write to a scratch tape volume. 3. Use the ALTER MEDIADEFS command to set the systemwide compression default setting on or off. For example: a. To set compression on by default for this system: MC> ALTER MEDIADEFS, COMPRESSION IDRC b. To set compression off by default for this system: MC> ALTER MEDIADEFS, COMPRESSION OFF 4. Enter EXIT to exit MEDIACOM and return to the TACL prompt: MC> EXIT 21> 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 49 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using a DEFINE to Override the Systemwide Compression Default Setting For more information about MEDIACOM and the ALTER MEDIADEFS command, see the DSM/Tape Catalog Operator Interface (MEDIACOM) Manual. Using a DEFINE to Override the Systemwide Compression Default Setting The systemwide compression default setting set by the MEDIACOM ALTER MEDIADEFS command applies to labeled and unlabeled tapes. After you set the systemwide default setting, the drives on the system always write using the default setting. You can override the default setting for a specific job by using a CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE. A CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE is a named set of attributes and values that specify information about a tape file. If you use labeled tape, you must create a CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE for each tape file to be accessed on that tape before you can use the tape. Using a CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE There are two types of tape DEFINEs: • • CLASS TAPE DEFINEs CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINEs If you are using the DSM/TC system, you must use a CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE. A CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE is similar to a CLASS TAPE DEFINE, but the CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE has two additional attributes: CATALOG { ON | OFF } Requests the services of the DSM/TC system (which might not be installed on your system). Specify OFF to use the CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE template without using DSM/TC. Specify ON to use DSM/TC. COMPRESSION { IDRC | OFF } Overrides the systemwide default compression setting on a job-by-job basis for any tape in a 5190 drive. (The 5194 tape drive is unaffected by this attribute.) COMPRESSION can be set on (IDRC) or OFF. Considerations • • After executing an I/O operation using a CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE, the system returns to the systemwide compression default setting for the next job. If you don’t specify the COMPRESSION attribute in the DEFINE, the system uses the systemwide default compression setting set by the MEDIACOM ALTER MEDIADEFS command. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 50 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL • • Using a DEFINE to Override the Systemwide Compression Default Setting If no systemwide default compression setting was set using the ALTER MEDIADEFS command, the default compression setting for any tape in a 5190 drive is off. Applications specifying a CLASS TAPE DEFINE always use the systemwide default compression setting for compression, because there is no COMPRESSION attribute for a CLASS TAPE DEFINE. Examples All examples assume that you are not using DSM/TC. Examples 1 and 2 show CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINEs specified for BACKUP operations. Example 1 This example for a labeled tape specifies a CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE named “=BACK” with compression on (IDRC). The USE OUT attribute specifies to write the file to tape. The BACKUP command copies all the files in the $DATA volume to tape. The LISTALL option lists the names of all files backed up, and the NOUNLOAD option directs BACKUP to rewind the final tape and leave it online when the BACKUP operation is complete. 1>ADD DEFINE =BACK, CLASS TAPECATALOG, LABELS BACKUP,& 1>&CATALOG OFF, COMPRESSION IDRC, USE OUT 2>BACKUP =BACK, $DATA.*.*, LISTALL, NOUNLOAD Example 2 This example for an unlabeled tape specifies a CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE named “=UNLABEL” with compression off. For unlabeled tape, you must specify a device in the DEFINE (in this example, DEVICE $TAPE1). Because it is an unlabeled tape, the LABELS attribute has the value OMITTED. 3>ADD DEFINE =UNLABEL, CLASS TAPECATALOG,& 3>&LABELS OMITTED, CATALOG OFF, DEVICE $TAPE1, COMPRESSION OFF 4>BACKUP =UNLABEL, $DATA.*.*, LISTALL, NOUNLOAD Example 3 This example for an unlabeled tape shows a BACKUP command that does not use a DEFINE. In this case, the tape drive writes data using the systemwide default compression setting. 5>BACKUP $TAPE, $DATA.*.* 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 51 Using SETMODE 162 to Override the Systemwide Compression Default Setting Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Example 4 This example for a labeled tape shows a File Utility Program (FUP) command that uses a CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE named “=FUPOUT” to turn compression on (IDRC). The USE OUT attribute specifies to write the file to tape. The FUP COPY command copies the contents of FILE1 record-by-record to volume IBM001. 6>ADD DEFINE =FUPOUT, CLASS TAPECATALOG, LABELS IBM,& 6>&VOLUME IBM001, COMPRESSION IDRC, USE OUT, CATALOG OFF 7>FUP COPY FILE1, =FUPOUT For More Information For more information about how to create DEFINEs and use them in labeled tape processing, see the Guardian User’s Guide and the Guardian Disk and Tape Utilities Reference Manual. For information on how to specify CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINEs, see the DSM/Tape Catalog User’s Guide. For more information on using the BACKUP and FUP utilities, see the Guardian Disk and Tape Utilities Reference Manual and the File Utility Program (FUP) Reference Manual, respectively. Using SETMODE 162 to Override the Systemwide Compression Default Setting If you do not want to use the systemwide default compression setting, you can use the Guardian SETMODE 162 procedure call to set compression on or off. Setting param1 Value No data compression 1 Data compression (IDRC) 2 Changes to compression using SETMODE 162 are allowed only at the beginning of tape (BOT); otherwise, the 5190 tape drive returns an error. (The 5194 tape drive ignores the SETMODE 162 procedure call.) Backup and FUP utilities ignore any compression setting made by a SETMODE operation. Using SCF to Set Compression Mode (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) You can use SCF to set or alter the tape compression mode on a 5190 tape drive. Compression is always on for a 5194 tape drive. The compression mode can be changed by: • • Using MEDIACOM to set a systemwide default setting Using the SETMODE 162 procedure call for a specific job 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 52 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Programming and Configuration Considerations To change the compression mode, first stop the drive, then use the SCF ALTER command to assign a value to the COMPRESSION option; for example: ->ALTER TAPE $TAPE0, COMPRESSION ON It is not necessary to specify a compression modifier in the PERIPHERALS paragraph if you set a systemwide default setting using the MEDIACOM ALTER MEDIADEFS command. The MEDIACOM default setting overrides this modifier. For more information, see the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. Programming and Configuration Considerations This subsection contains information for programmers and operations personnel. Guardian Procedure Calls The modular tape subsystem supports the following Guardian procedure calls: AWAITIO[X] FILE_GETINFOBYNAME CANCELREQ FILEINFO CLOSE FILEINQUIRE CONTROL OPEN DEVICE_GETINFOBYLDEV (D-series only) READ[X] DEVICE_GETINFOBYNAME (D-series only) SETMODE CONFIG_GETINFO_BYLDEV2_ (G-series only) SETMODENOWAIT CONFIG_GETINFO_BYNAME2_ (G-series only) WRITE[X] DEVICEINFO For more information about using Guardian procedure calls for controlling your tape drives, see the Guardian Procedure Calls Reference Manual and the Guardian Programmer’s Guide. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 53 Valid CONTROL Operations Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Valid CONTROL Operations The following table shows valid CONTROL operations for the modular tape subsystem: Number Operation 2 Write file mark 3 Rewind and unload (wait) 5 Rewind and leave online (no wait) 6 Rewind and leave online (wait) 7 Forward space file 8 Backward space file 9 Forward space record 10 Backward space record 24 Force end of volume (valid only for labeled tape) 26 Immediate I/O completion (commit data to tape and report error in case of data loss) For more information about the CONTROL procedure call, see the Guardian Procedure Calls Reference Manual and the Guardian Programmer’s Guide. Choosing Block Size D30 and subsequent releases let you create much larger data records when writing to tape: up to 56 kilobytes (KB). If, however, you want to create block sizes that can be read by most NonStop Himalaya servers, tape drives, and control units, you should not create data records larger than 32,767 bytes (32 KB minus 1 byte) in size. For a detailed discussion of this limit as it relates to the BACKUP and RESTORE utilities, see Using the BLOCKSIZE Option on page 4-40. SETMODE Attributes The SETMODE procedure call specifies four attributes of the 5190 and 5194 tape drives. The system returns an error for any SETMODE parameters other than the supported parameters. • SETMODE 66 sets the tape density. The 5190 and 5194 drives currently support only one density setting: Setting param1 Value 38000 bpi 8 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 54 Running in Buffered Mode Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL • • • SETMODE 99 sets the buffering mode of the 3216 controller with the modular tape subsystem. Changing the buffering mode can affect system performance and error reporting. See Running in Buffered Mode on page 4-55. Setting param1 Value Buffering off (record-level recovery) 0 Buffer data (file-level recovery) 1 Buffer file marks (reel-level recovery) 2 SETMODE 119 sets the tape mode. The 5190 and 5194 drives currently support only one tape mode setting: Setting param1 Value Set tape mode to default streaming speed 1 SETMODE 162 sets the compression mode (5190 tape drive only): Setting param1 Value No data compression 1 Data compression (IDRC) 2 Changes to compression using SETMODE 162 are allowed only at the beginningof-tape (BOT) mark. Otherwise, the 5190 tape drive returns an error. For more information about the SETMODE procedure call, see the Guardian Procedure Calls Reference Manual and the Guardian Programmer’s Guide. Running in Buffered Mode Running a streaming drive in buffered mode improves performance over nonbuffered mode, depending on the size of the files involved. File buffering, however, affects error reporting. If the buffering mode is not explicitly set by an application, the tape process disables buffering by default, resulting in record-level recovery. When record-level recovery is used, the application is notified of an I/O completion as soon as the data resides on the tape. An error is returned if the data was not successfully written. How Buffering Affects Error Reporting When buffering data (file-level recovery), the tape process and the tape drive allocate storage for multiple records and return I/O completion to the application immediately. If an error occurs while the drive writes data to tape, the application is notified during a subsequent I/O operation. When the application attempts to write a file mark (CONTROL 2), all buffered data is flushed to the tape and any errors encountered are returned as the result of the CONTROL operation. Thus, an application can never know which record was written incorrectly to tape—only that an error occurred. When buffering data and file marks (reel-level recovery), data and file marks are stored in temporary buffers. To guarantee that data has successfully been written to tape, 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 55 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Memory Dump (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) applications must call CONTROL with the value 26 to flush all outstanding buffers to tape. CONTROL returns an error if any buffers are not successfully written to tape. Table 4-11 examines the performance trade-offs between buffering and error reporting. Table 4-11. Buffered Mode Performance Mode Performance Buffering off (record-level recovery) Performance is slowest for all file sizes. Error reporting, however, is immediate; when a tape request fails, the error is associated with the current record. Buffer data (file-level recovery) Performance is good for large files but poor for small files. Error reporting is at the file level: when a buffered-tape request fails, the error is associated with the current file and the application must recover the file. Buffer data and file marks (reel-level recovery) Performance is best of the three modes. Error reporting is at the volume level: when a buffered request fails, the error is associated with the current volume or reel and the application must recover the entire volume. Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Memory Dump (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) If you want to use a 5190 or 5194 tape drive to capture memory dumps, read the following information. NonStop Himalaya K2, K100, K200, K1000, K1000SE, K2000, and K2000SE Server Memory Dumps When you use the Copy Memory: Tape screen on the system control panel to dump memory, the internal cartridge tape in the base system cabinet (cabinet 1) is used by default. However, you can use a 5190 or 5194 tape drive for memory dumps (from the control panel) if the system is configured in one of the following ways: • MFC connection The 5190 or 5194 tape drive CRU is attached to an MFC that is connected to processor 0 or processor 1 (the MFC must be in the base system cabinet or in I/O cabinet 1A) and the tape drive is specified as the default drive to be used for memory dumps. (You use TMDS MDS subsystem commands to do this. See the TMDS Reference Manual.) • 3216 controller connection The 5190 or 5194 tape drive CRU is attached to a 3216 controller located in the base system cabinet or in I/O cabinet 1A, and the drive is designated as unit 5 on the 3216 controller (in the system configuration file). The tape drive must be specified as the default drive to be used for memory dumps. (You use TMDS MDS subsystem commands to do this. See the TMDS Reference Manual.) 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 56 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Memory Dump (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) Before performing a Copy Memory: Tape task, be sure to load a write-enabled cartridge tape in the tape drive and bring the drive online. Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Memory Dump (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) You can perform a memory dump to disk while a processor is running. However, if a processor is down, you can dump memory only to tape. All processors in the system must be halted before performing a memory dump to tape. Caution. Performing a memory dump to tape on a running system can result in disk corruption. If you need to dump a processor’s memory to tape, you must perform one of the following tasks: • • Halt all processors and perform a memory dump as described in the Himalaya S-Series Operations Guide. You can perform a memory dump in the TSM Processor Status dialog box in the TSM Low-Level Link Application. Dump the processor to disk as described in the Himalaya S-Series Operations Guide. Use the BACKUP utility to copy the dump to tape. See the Guardian Disk and Tape Utilities Reference Manual for information about the BACKUP utility. For instructions on how to dump an entire system, how to make a compressed disk copy of a memory dump file, and how to submit a memory dump to your service provider, refer to the Himalaya S-Series Operations Guide. Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Tape Load (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) Caution. Compaq recommends that you perform a tape load only after consulting with your service provider, and attempting other system disk recovery options. Tape load is a destructive function that destroys the files on the system disk. It is an emergency method for starting the system when no operating system image is available on disk. If your system disk becomes corrupted and you are unable to load the system from a disk image, you may bring up the system by performing a tape load from the system image tape (SIT); a tape load will restore the system image files to the $SYSTEM disk. If you want to perform a tape load with a 5190 or 5194 tape drive, verify the following information for the system you are using. NonStop Himalaya K2, K100, K200, K1000, K1000SE, K2000, and K2000SE Server Tape Loads Using the system control panel (SCP) to load the system image from the system image tape (SIT) is referred to as a tape load. If you want to use a 5190 or 5194 tape drive attached to an MFC as the tape load device, verify that the tape drive is connected to 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 57 Operating the Cartridge Tape Drive and ACL Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Tape Load (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) MFC 0 or 1 in the base system cabinet (cabinet 1). When you perform a tape load, the tape drives cannot be attached to a 3216 controller. NonStop Himalaya K1000SE, K2000SE, K10000, and K20000 Server Tape Loads Using the Remote Maintenance Interface (RMI) terminal to load the system image from the system image tape (SIT) is referred to as a tape load. If you want to use a 5190 or 5194 tape drive attached to an MFC as the tape load device, verify that: • • • • The MFC is installed in an MF-8 I/O cabinet configured with processors 0 and 1 (using the same processor pair as $SYSTEM). $SYSTEM is configured on a pair of 42xx disk drives in the same MF-8 I/O cabinet with the MFC. $SYSTEM disks are attached to the same MFC that the tape drive is attached to. The MFC and tape drive are properly configured in the system configuration file. Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Tape Load (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) Caution. Compaq recommends that you perform a tape load only after consulting with your service provider and attempting other system disk recovery options. Tape load is a destructive function that destroys the files on the system disk. It is an emergency method for starting the system when no operating system image is available on disk. You cannot load the system from a tape drive that is connected to a 6760 adapter. You must use a tape drive that is connected to the SCSI port of a PMF CRU in group 01. If your system disk becomes corrupted and you are unable to load the system from a disk image, you may bring up the system by performing a tape load from the system image tape (SIT); a tape load will restore the system image files to the $SYSTEM disk. Then you restore from your most recent system backup those files that are not on the SIT. Refer to the Himalaya S-Series Operations Guide for alternative system disk recovery options. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 4- 58 5 Using TMDS or the TSM Package This section briefly describes the Compaq Tandem Maintenance and Diagnostic System (TMDS), introduces the Compaq TSM package, and describes the degree to which each interacts with the modular tape subsystem. Terms that appear in bold are defined in the glossary of this manual. TMDS is an online system that records, reports, and diagnoses system malfunctions for NonStop Himalaya K-series servers. In addition to describing the TMDS TAPE subsystem, this section summarizes current release information related to TMDS. The TSM package is a client/server application that provides troubleshooting, maintenance, and service tools for NonStop Himalaya S-series servers. See The TSM Package (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) on page 5-7. The TMDS TAPE Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) The TMDS TAPE subsystem provides online diagnostic and maintenance support for most tape drives and controllers. The selected TMDS TAPE commands listed in this section support the 5190 and 5194 tape drives, the MFC, and the 3216 controller. For all the operational details about the TMDS TAPE subsystem, see the TMDS Reference Manual. Accessing the TAPE Subsystem To run TMDS TAPE subsystem commands, first do one of the following: • At the system (TACL) prompt, enter: TMDS TAPE • At any other TMDS subsystem prompt, enter: SWITCHTO TAPE TMDS displays the TAPE subsystem prompt (TAPE>). > TMDS TAPE TMDS - Tandem Maintenance and Diagnostic System - T9497D31 - (07JUL95) Copyright Tandem Computers Incorporated 1985-1994 Type HELP for an introduction to TMDS. Type HELP CHANGES to see D31 changes. Type HELP TMDSSIG for help on mailing questions or comments to TMDS. The current subsystem is the TAPE subsystem. TAPE> 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 5 -1 Using TMDS or the TSM Package TAPE Subsystem Commands TAPE Subsystem Commands The following TAPE subsystem commands are supported by the 5190 and 5194 tape drives, the MFC, and the 3216 controller. They are designed to check system hardware operation or to isolate a failing hardware component. TMDS Command Description EXERCISE Writes and reads random-length records on tape, tests the various tape-movement commands, and verifies the tape hardware after repairs and during installation. For the 5190 drive, this command can be run with data compression on or off. FIRMINFO Checks the firmware status of controllers in the TAPE subsystem. FLASH (not valid for the MFC) Flashes the locator LED on the BEB on and off. (The 3216 controller can also light this LED, without flashing it, when the controller detects an error.) The FLASH OFF command turns off the LED. PATHPROBE (not valid for the MFC) Tests alternate paths between tape controllers and the processors to which they are attached without requiring a path switch. STATUS (not valid for the MFC) Displays current information about the configuration and status of the controllers and tape drives in the system. The information is displayed in raw format or decoded English text. TEST Runs diagnostics on tape controllers and tape drives. UPDATE (not valid for the MFC) Updates the revision level of a controller board, and downloads and verifies microcode in writable control store (WCS) and boot PROM (firmware). Commands that have no diagnostic value for the modular tape subsystem are not listed here. For operational details on all TMDS TAPE subsystem commands, refer to information about the TMDS TAPE subsystem in the TMDS Reference Manual. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 5 -2 TAPE Subsystem Help Subjects Using TMDS or the TSM Package TAPE Subsystem Help Subjects For help with the TAPE subsystem, enter any of the following commands at the TAPE> prompt to display detailed information: Command Description HELP TAPE Introduces the TAPE subsystem commands and help subjects, and gives examples of TAPE HELP commands. HELP CHANGES Lists the major additions and changes to the TAPE subsystem software in the current software release. HELP COMMANDS Lists and briefly defines the TAPE subsystem commands. HELP command-name Describes a particular TAPE subsystem command: tells what the command does and what its parameters and their legal values are, and explains its syntax. HELP EVENTS Lists and briefly describes the TAPE subsystem events that are sent to the event log. HELP event-name Tells the meaning of the specified event and, if applicable, suggests action to take in response to the event. HELP EVevent-number Gives the same information as “HELP eventname” except that you specify the event by number rather than by name (for example, HELP EV316). HELP LABELEDTAPES Describes how to run tape diagnostics in a labeled tape environment. HELP STATUS nnnn Describes the drive status bytes for each controller type, where nnnn is the controller type. HELP TERMSTAT nnnn Describes the termination status codes generated by each controller, where nnnn is the controller number. HELP TOKENS Lists and briefly describes the tokens that make up TAPE subsystem events. HELP token-name Describes the meaning of the named token. In addition, you can request information on any of the following general TMDS help subjects from the TAPE> prompt: HELP COMMAND-ENTRY HELP DOCUMENTS HELP EVENT-LOG HELP NUMBERS HELP STARTUP HELP STRINGS HELP SUBSYSTEMS HELP TIMES HELP TPR 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 5 -3 Using TMDS or the TSM Package TMDS Highlights (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) TMDS Highlights (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) The TMDS TAPE subsystem provides operational information on all supported tape drives. The following information summarizes selected details that you should know about the TMDS FLASH and STATUS commands. The FLASH Command The FLASH ON command flashes (on and off) the internal yellow locator LED inside the tape drive BEB (the tape drive must be attached to a 3216 tape controller). This command is useful when service providers need to verify the location of a faulty BEB. The FLASH OFF command turns off the LED. For a description of each of the BEB LEDs, see Replacing a BEB on page 6-2. The 3216 controller can also light the locator LED, without flashing it, if the controller detects an error. For more information, enter the following command at the TAPE subsystem prompt: HELP FLASH The FLASH command syntax is: FLASH [DRIVE] $drive [, [SWITCH] { ON | OFF } ] [DRIVE] $drive is the logical device number or name of the tape drive whose BEB locator LED is affected by this command. There is no default value; you must enter a value for this parameter. [SWITCH] { ON | OFF } specifies the action for the BEB locator LED. ON means to flash the LED on and off. OFF means to turn off the LED. The default action is ON. Specify OFF to turn off the BEB locator LED regardless of why it was lit. (The BEB locator LED can be activated as a result of the FLASH command or by the 3216 controller when it detects an error.) 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 5 -4 Using TMDS or the TSM Package The STATUS Command The STATUS Command Information for the STATUS command is retrieved from primary and backup tape processes. It represents the tape-process view of configuration and may not reflect the actual physical configuration. To display status information for the tape drive named $TAPE, enter the following command: STATUS DRIVE $TAPE TMDS displays information similar to the following example. TAPE> STATUS DRIVE $TAPE TMDS TAPE DIAGNOSTICS - T9497D31 - (07JUL95) COPYRIGHT TANDEM COMPUTERS INCORPORATED 1985 - 1994 -----------------------------------------------------------------------| TAPE STATUS COMMAND INPUT INFORMATION 16 SEP 96 16:31:29 | | | | DRIVE : $TAPE | | CPU : ALL | | DRIVEDATA : DECODED/RAW for 3217/5188 | -----------------------------------------------------------------------Primary Pin: 31 System Backup Pin: 31 +=======+ Ch 1 +=======================================+ Ch 1 +=======+ | Cpu5 |*******| Controller %0 Type 3216 |*******| Cpu4 | +=======+ +=======================================+ +=======+ * U * (-P) * +======================================================+ | $TAPE, $54, Unit 5 | | Type 5194 - (compression on) | | | | Tape odometer read/write hours: 32.25 | | Total sectors processed: 45,163 | | ACL installed. | | Cartridge Map: Slot 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 | | (I=tape in; O=tape out) O O O O O O O | | | | Drive Status: | | Rewinding , | | Sense Key = 2 (Not Ready) Logical Unit not ready , | | Buffered/Streaming , 36 tracks , IDRC installed ,| | Compressed- Compact , Max ACL slot # 7 , | | Auto ACL mode , Vendor ID: FUJITSU , | | Product ID: M2483 M2483B , Product Rev: 0103 , | | SIC ucode: 03/03/5 A04-A , | | FMTR ucode: 03/02/5 F46-A | | | | | +======================================================+ TAPE> 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 5 -5 Using TMDS or the TSM Package The STATUS Command This example STATUS display shows: • • • • • • $TAPE is a 5194 tape drive. The controller type for $TAPE is 3216, indicating a 3216 controller. If $TAPE were attached to an MFC, the controller type would be 3681. The unit number assigned to $TAPE when it was added to the system configuration (using COUP or SYSGENR) was 5. The unit number must match the device ID for the drive, which is set using the drive front panel. (See Checking and Setting the Device ID on page 3-41.) Compression mode is on, indicating that compression mode was on during the last write operation. If the compression mode changes (as a result of a MEDIACOM command, for example), this field does not reflect the change until after the next write operation. A change in the compression mode is possible only with 5190 tape drives; the 5194 drive operates with compression mode on at all times. The cartridge map shows the location and number of cartridges currently loaded in the ACL cartridge magazine, which is helpful during unattended backups. The example shows no cartridges in slots 1 through 7. Slot 1 is empty because the cartridge is in the drive. The state of the drive is Rewinding, Sense Key = 2, (Not Ready) Logical Unit not ready. This indicates that the cartridge is rewinding in the drive and that it is not ready to write or read data. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 5 -6 The TSM Package (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) Using TMDS or the TSM Package The TSM Package (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) The TSM package supports the following actions for the 5190/5194 tape drive. TSM Object TSM Application Effect CRU Responsive Test Tape TSM Service Application Verifies that a tape drive is installed and responding. Down Tape TSM Service Application Puts the tape drive in the stopped state, with a warning if the tape drive is currently in use. Tape Dump Processor TSM LowLevel Link Application Writes data from the memory of a halted processor onto a tape (server must be halted). This procedure is described briefly in this manual under Using a 5190 or 5194 Drive for a Memory Dump (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) on page 4-57 and in full detail in the Himalaya S-Series Operations Guide. Forced Down Tape TSM Service Application Puts the tape drive in the stopped state, even if the drive is currently in use. Test Extended Tape TSM Service Application Performs a loop write-to-read test. Test Verify Tape TSM Service Application Runs the power-on self-test for the tape drive and tests its internal circuitry (tape drive must be in the down state). Up Tape TSM Service Application Puts the tape drive in the started state. TSM Action If you intend to perform one of these TSM actions, refer to the TSM Service Application or TSM Low-Level Link Application online help for help on using the TSM windows and dialog boxes. You can also use the TSM package to check the 6760 adapter hardware, as described in the 6760 ServerNet/DA Manual. Access to the TSM package is available only from the primary and backup system console or a TSM workstation. For more information about TSM concepts, commands, and dialog boxes and how to perform TSM tape tasks, see the TSM Online User Guide. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 5 -7 Using TMDS or the TSM Package The TSM Package (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 5 -8 6 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs This section tells you how to add, remove, and replace modular tape subsystem components that are customer-replaceable units (CRUs). Topic Page Procedures That Require a Service Provider 6-1 Replacing a BEB 6-2 Replacing a 5190 or 5194 Tape Drive CRU 6-5 Returning a Tape Drive CRU to Compaq 6-10 Replacing a Cleaning Cartridge in an ACL 6-10 Removing a Cleaning Cartridge From an ACL 6-11 Replacing a Controller (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 6-12 Replacing a NonStop Himalaya S-Series Server Adapter 6-15 Information about replacing CRUs is documented in the following manuals: K-Series Servers Manuals Himalaya K100 and K1000/K2000 Support Guide Himalaya K10000/K20000 Support Guide NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers Manuals Himalaya S-Series Hardware Support Guide Unless stated otherwise, each of the following topics applies to both NonStop Himalaya K-series servers and NonStop Himalaya S-series servers. Procedures That Require a Service Provider Not all replacement procedures for the modular tape subsystem can be performed by users at the installation site. The following procedures must be performed by a trained service provider: • • • • • • • Troubleshooting or repairing a 5190 or 5194 tape drive CRU Troubleshooting or repairing an ACL Disassembling a module Adding a second tape drive CRU to an installed module Adding an ACL to an installed module Adding a module to an installed modular storage system stack Extracting a cartridge tape from a failed drive 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6 -1 Replacing a BEB Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Replacing a BEB The back-end board (BEB) translates fiber-optic signals from a 3216 controller or a 6761 fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC) on a 6760 adapter into SCSI commands and information for the 5190 and 5194 tape drives. The BEB contains four light-emitting diodes (LEDs) with the following functions: BEB LED Function Green external LED Indicates that the BEB has power. Yellow external LED Indicates that the optical carrier signal is present. Amber-orange internal LED Indicates an error condition. Yellow internal LED (locator LED) (NonStop Himalaya K-series servers only) Is used as an aid in identifying or locating the failing BEB (the tape drive CRU must be attached to a 3216 controller). This LED can be flashed on and off by the TMDS FLASH command. You can see the internal LEDs by looking through the slots in the BEB enclosure. They are next to each other, near the bottom edge of the BEB circuit board. The internal LEDs are considerably smaller than the external LEDs and difficult to see when not lit. The internal LEDs are used by trained service providers. Customers do not need to use these LEDs to troubleshoot the BEB. Troubleshooting a BEB If either external BEB LED is not lit when power is applied to the drive CRU, there is a problem. Table 6-1 lists possible causes listed in order of likelihood, where 1 is the most likely cause. Table 6-1. Troubleshooting a BEB External LED Is Not Lit Possible Causes Green (Power) 1. 2. Yellow (Carrier Signal) 3. 4. Drive CRU is powered off. Drive CRU is powered on, but BEB power cabling needs repair. BEB has power, but the voltage is low. LED circuitry is faulty. 1. 2. 3. 4. Cable is connected improperly or disconnected. 3216 logic board or 6760 adapter is not powered on. Cable is broken or damaged. LED circuitry is broken. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6 -2 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Removing a BEB Removing a BEB If you determine that a BEB has failed, order a new BEB and use the following procedure to remove the defective BEB. Caution. The BEB contains static-sensitive components. Be sure to touch a grounded object before touching the BEB. Compaq recommends that you use an electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection kit to protect electronic and static-sensitive components such as the BEB from electrostatic discharge. For ESD guidelines, see the Himalaya S-Series Hardware Support Guide. 1. Shut down the application software that uses the tape drive. If the BEB serves two drives, you must bring down both drives. 2. Do the following for NonStop Himalaya K-series servers: Use PUP to bring down the path to the tape drives. For example: 1> PUP # DOWN $TAPE1 # DOWN $TAPE2 # EXIT 3. Do one of the following for NonStop Himalaya S-series servers: • Use SCF to bring down the path to the tape drive. For example: 1> -> -> -> • SCF STOP $TAPE1 STOP $TAPE2 EXIT Select the tape drive in the TSM Service Application and use the Down action to bring down the tape drive itself. 4. Open the rear bezel door of the tape drive module. See Opening and Removing the Rear Bezel Door on page 3-23. 5. Remove power from each tape drive CRU that uses the BEB by setting the AC power switch at the rear of each drive CRU to the OFF (0) position. (See Figure 3-24 on page 3-39.) 6. Remove the fiber-optic cable connector from the socket on top of the BEB enclosure by squeezing the latches and pulling straight up. (See Figure 3-15 on page 3-28.) 7. Loosen the captive wing nut that holds the BEB enclosure to the rear of the drive CRU. One half-turn is enough to loosen this nut. 8. Grasping the BEB enclosure firmly with two hands, pull the BEB enclosure straight off the rear of the drive CRU. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6 -3 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Installing a BEB Installing a BEB To install a BEB, use the following procedure: Caution. The BEB contains static-sensitive components. Be sure to touch a grounded object before touching the BEB. Compaq recommends that you use an electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection kit to protect electronic and static-sensitive components such as the BEB from electrostatic discharge. For ESD guidelines, see the Himalaya S-Series Hardware Support Guide. 1. Make sure power is removed from each tape drive CRU that uses the BEB you are installing. 2. Holding the BEB enclosure with two hands, align the captive wing nut and the 50-pin connector on the side of the BEB with the screw hole and the unterminated SCSI port on the rear of the drive CRU. Plug the enclosure into the connector. 3. Push and tighten the wing nut to secure the BEB enclosure to the rear of the drive CRU. 4. Remove the filler plug, if necessary, from the fiber-optic cable socket on top of the BEB enclosure, and plug the fiber-optic cable connector into the socket. 5. Reapply power to the tape drive CRU by setting the AC power switch to the ON (|) position. 6. Do the following for NonStop Himalaya K-series servers: a. Use PUP to bring up the path to the tape drives. For example: 1> PUP # UP $TAPE1 # UP $TAPE2 # EXIT b. Run TMDS diagnostics to check the integrity of the modular tape subsystem. You can use the TEST command to verify the operation of the BEB. For a summary description, see The TMDS TAPE Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) on page 5-1. 7. Do one of the following for NonStop Himalaya S-series servers: a. Bring up the tape drive in either of these ways: • Use SCF to bring up the path to the tape drive. For example: 1> -> -> -> • SCF START $TAPE1 START $TAPE2 EXIT Select the tape drive in the TSM Service Application and use the Up action to bring up the tape drive itself. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6 -4 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Replacing a 5190 or 5194 Tape Drive CRU b. Use the TSM Service Application to check the integrity of the modular tape subsystem. You can use the TEST command to verify the operation of the BEB. For a summary description, see The TSM Package (NonStop Himalaya S-Series Servers) on page 5-7. Replacing a 5190 or 5194 Tape Drive CRU The tape drive CRU contains the tape drive, power supply, and, optionally, the flush-mounted ACL. Components of the drive CRU cannot be repaired by customers. If a component fails, the entire drive CRU must be replaced. If you are replacing a 5190 tape drive CRU with a 5194 tape drive CRU: • • Verify that the system is running a D30.01+ or later D3x release. Firmware for the controller and tape drive must also be installed during the update to the operating system. To avoid unreliability in the drive CRU you are installing, use the most recent version of firmware. No configuration changes are required. Removing a Tape Drive CRU After ordering a replacement tape drive CRU, use the following procedure to remove an inoperative tape drive CRU. WARNING. When it includes an ACL, the tape drive CRU weighs 75 pounds (34 kilograms). To avoid strain or injury, always use at least two people to lift the drive CRU out of the module. 1. Use the UNLOAD button or software commands to unload any cartridge that might be loaded in the tape drive. If the drive CRU has an ACL, be sure to remove the cleaning cartridge from the ACL. See Removing a Cleaning Cartridge From an ACL on page 6-11. 2. Shut down the application software that uses the affected tape drive. You must bring down both drives if you are using a BEB and the BEB serves two drives. 3. Shut down the path to the affected tape drives: • For NonStop Himalaya K-series servers, use PUP as follows: 1>PUP #DOWN $TAPE1 #DOWN $TAPE2 #EXIT • For NonStop Himalaya S-series servers, use SCF as follows: 1>SCF ->STOP $TAPE1 ->STOP $TAPE2 ->EXIT 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6 -5 Removing a Tape Drive CRU Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs 4. Remove the rear bezel door of the tape drive module. See Opening and Removing the Rear Bezel Door on page 3-23. 5. Remove power from each tape drive CRU by setting the AC power switch at the rear of each drive CRU to the OFF (0) position. (See Figure 3-24 on page 3-39.) 6. Unplug the AC power cord from the rear of the drive CRU to be removed. Leave the AC power cord in place for use with the replacement CRU. 7. Perform one of the actions in the following table: If the Drive CRU Attaches to Action MFC (NonStop Himalaya K-series server) Remove the cable from the drive CRU SCSI port. 3216 controller (NonStop Himalaya K-series server) Remove the fiber-optic cable from the BEB. PMF CRU (NonStop Himalaya S-series server) Remove the SCSI cable from the drive CRU SCSI port. S-PIC on 6760 adapter (NonStop Himalaya S-series server) Remove the cable from the drive CRU SCSI port. F-PIC on 6760 adapter (NonStop Himalaya S-series server) Remove the fiber-optic cable from the BEB. Leave the cables in place for attachment to the replacement drive CRU. 8. If the drive CRU to be removed has a BEB, remove the BEB using the procedure in Replacing a BEB on page 6-2. 9. (NonStop Himalaya K-series servers only) If a daisy-chain cable links the drive CRU to be removed to a second drive CRU in the module, disconnect the cable from the drive CRU that you are removing. Prepare to pull the drive CRU out of the module. With a person on each side of the drive CRU ready to support the drive CRU, press down on the locking clip and pull on the pull-out handle at the bottom of the drive CRU. Support the underside of the drive CRU as it emerges from the module. Do not try to support the CRU by the pull-out handle (see Figure 6-1). Caution. Do not lift the drive CRU by the pull-out handle. The pull-out handle is only for sliding the drive CRU into and out of the module. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6 -6 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Removing a Tape Drive CRU Figure 6-1. Removing a Tape Drive CRU Drive CRU Pull-Out Handle VST023.vsd 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6 -7 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Installing a Tape Drive CRU Installing a Tape Drive CRU Use the following procedure to install a replacement tape drive CRU: 1. Unpack the tape drive CRU to be installed from the shipping container and remove all packaging. Save the packaging for the defective drive CRU you are returning to Compaq. WARNING. When it includes an ACL, the tape drive CRU weighs 75 pounds (34 kilograms). To avoid strain or injury, always use at least two people to lift the drive CRU. 2. With a person on each side of the drive CRU, support the underside of the drive CRU with one hand and steady the drive CRU by resting the other hand on the pull-out handle at the rear of the drive CRU. Do not try to support the CRU by the pull-out handle. Lift the drive CRU from the underside and insert the drive or ACL end into the rear of the tape drive module. Slide the drive CRU forward along the guides until the rear of the drive CRU passes the locking clip on the base of the module. Caution. Do not lift the drive CRU by the pull-out handle. The pull-out handle is only for sliding the drive CRU into and out of the module 3. If the drive CRU has an ACL, remove the foam packing piece that supports the autoloader and prevents vibration during shipment. Then put the cartridge magazine (packaged separately) on the carriage in the cartridge magazine compartment. See Using the Cartridge Magazine on page 4-11. Use the foam packing piece to support the ACL autoloader in the drive CRU that you are returning to Compaq for repair. 4. (NonStop Himalaya K-series servers only) If the drive CRU attaches to a 3216 controller, install the BEB. See Installing the BEB (Fiber-Optic Cables Only) on page 3-25. 5. Connect and route the AC power cord following the procedure in Connecting and Routing the AC Power Cords on page 3-26. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6 -8 Installing a Tape Drive CRU Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs 6. Perform one of the following actions: If the Drive CRU Attaches to Action MFC (NonStop Himalaya K-series server) Connect the cable to the drive CRU SCSI port. See Connecting a NonStop Himalaya K-Series SCSI Cable to the Drive CRU on page 3-30. 3216 controller (NonStop Himalaya K-series server) Connect the fiber-optic cable to the BEB. See Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the BEB on page 3-28. PMF CRU (NonStop Himalaya S-series server) Connect the SCSI cable to the drive CRU SCSI port. See Connecting a NonStop Himalaya S-Series SCSI Cable to the Drive CRU on page 3-32. S-PIC on 6760 ServerNet/DA (NonStop Himalaya S-series server) Connect the fiber-optic or SCSI cable to the F-PIC or S-PIC in the 6760 adapter. See the 6760 ServerNet/DA Manual. F-PIC on 6760 ServerNet/DA (NonStop Himalaya S-series server) Connect the SCSI cable to the S-PIC. See the 6760 ServerNet/DA Manual. 7. (NonStop Himalaya K-series servers only) If you installed a second drive CRU into a module and both drive CRUs use the same 3216 controller, reconnect the daisy-chain cable that links the two drive CRUs. 8. Bring up the paths to the controller using either the PUP UP command (for NonStop Himalaya K-series servers) or the SCF START command (for NonStop Himalaya S-series servers). 9. Run TMDS diagnostics (for NonStop Himalaya K-series servers) or the TSM Service Application or SCF (for NonStop Himalaya S-series servers) to test the tape drive CRU. When using TMDS, you can use the TMDS TEST command to verify the operation of the drive. For a brief summary, see The TMDS TAPE Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) on page 5-1, or for more detail, see the information about the TMDS TAPE subsystem in the TMDS Reference Manual. For a brief summary of TSM Service Application tests, see Testing a Tape Device on page 3-46. When using SCF, you can use the SCF STATUS, DETAIL command to show the processor numbers for the tape process, the logical device number of the tape drive, and the current state of the tape drive. For more detail on SCF commands, see the SCF Reference Manual for the Storage Subsystem. 10. If the drive CRU has an ACL, install the cleaning cartridge in the ACL before using the drive. See Installing the Cleaning Cartridge in the ACL on page 3-44. 11. Use the procedure under Checking and Setting the Device ID on page 3-41 to check the device ID and reset it, if necessary. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6 -9 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Returning a Tape Drive CRU to Compaq Returning a Tape Drive CRU to Compaq To prevent damage to a tape drive CRU you are returning to Compaq for repair, do the following before shipping the unit: 1. Before removing power from the tape drive CRU, unload any cartridge loaded in the tape drive. Do not ship a drive CRU with a cartridge loaded in the tape drive unless you were unable to remove it. 2. If the drive CRU has an ACL, remove the cleaning cartridge from the ACL before returning the drive CRU for repair. See Removing a Cleaning Cartridge From an ACL on page 6-11. 3. If the drive CRU has an ACL, insert the foam packing piece (saved from the replacement drive CRU) into the ACL autoloader of the drive CRU before packing the drive CRU for shipment. 4. Use the box and packing materials saved from a replacement drive CRU to pack a drive CRU for return to Compaq. 5. Any controller logic board, controller BIC, BEB, or adapter should be protected in a separate plastic antistatic bag and reshipped in the same packing material in which the replacement component was received, between two layers of foam packing. 6. Call your service provider for shipping instructions. Replacing a Cleaning Cartridge in an ACL The ACL is programmed to request a new cleaning cartridge after 100 cleaning cycles. When the cleaning cartridge needs to be replaced, the ACL displays the following message: WARNING!! CHANGE CLEANING CARTRIDGE IN CLEANING CELL You can replace an old cartridge with a new cartridge by putting a new cleaning cartridge into the cartridge magazine and pressing buttons on the ACL front panel, as follows: WARNING. Do not attempt to remove a cleaning cartridge from its storage chamber by hand. Doing so could cause personal injury or damage the autoloader. 1. Press the RESET button to take the ACL offline. 2. Press the UNLOAD button to rewind, unload, and eject the cartridge from the drive. 3. Open the cartridge magazine door, extend the carriage, and lift out the cartridge magazine. 4. Mount a new cleaning cartridge in the top slot (slot 1) of the cartridge magazine. Most cleaning cartridges are clearly marked with the number of cleaning cycles they provide. Use only cartridges from a reputable manufacturer that provide 100 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6- 10 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Removing a Cleaning Cartridge From an ACL cleaning cycles. To prevent problems with reading and writing tape, even if you have a 500-count cleaning cartridge, do not use the cleaning cartridge for more than 100 cleaning cycles. An internal counter tracks how many times the cleaning cartridge is used. Removing the cleaning cartridge from the ACL resets the counter to zero. Therefore, whenever you remove a cleaning cartridge, never reinstall it in an ACL. 5. Remove any cartridge from the second slot (slot 2) of the cartridge magazine. This slot must remain empty in order to receive the used cleaning cartridge. 6. Replace the cartridge magazine in the ACL and close the magazine door. 7. Press the SHIFT and UNLOAD buttons simultaneously to place the ACL in the replacement mode. The CHG CLN message appears on the message panel. 8. Press the TEST button twice to start the replacement sequence. The ACL unloads the old cleaning cartridge, placing it in the empty slot 2 of the cartridge magazine. Next it loads the new cleaning cartridge from slot 1 into the drive to confirm the cartridge type. The ACL then loads the new cleaning cartridge into the cleaning cartridge storage chamber. The ACL internal cleaning counter is reset to 0. 9. Open the cartridge magazine door, extend the carriage, and lift out the cartridge magazine. 10. Remove the old cleaning cartridge from slot 2 of the cartridge magazine. Removing a Cleaning Cartridge From an ACL The cleaning cartridge must be removed from the ACL of a tape drive CRU that you are returning to Compaq for repair. Use the following procedure to remove (without replacing) a storage cleaning cartridge: WARNING. Do not attempt to remove the cleaning cartridge from its chamber by hand. Doing so could cause personal injury or damage the autoloader. 1. Rewind and unload any tape mounted in the drive, and take the drive offline by pressing the RESET button and then the UNLOAD button. 2. Open the cartridge magazine door, extend the carriage, and lift out the cartridge magazine. 3. Remove any cartridges in slots 1 and 2 of the cartridge magazine. 4. Replace the cartridge magazine in the ACL and close the magazine door. 5. Press the SHIFT and UNLOAD buttons simultaneously to place the ACL in the replacement mode. The CHG CLN message appears on the message panel. 6. Press the START button twice. The EJCT CLN message appears on the message panel. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6- 11 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Replacing a Controller (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) 7. Press the TEST button twice to start the replacement sequence. The ACL unloads the cleaning cartridge, placing it in the empty slot 2 of the cartridge magazine. Press the RESET button to clear the message panel. 8. Remove the cartridge magazine from the ACL, and extract the cleaning cartridge from slot 2. Replacing a Controller (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) This subsection describes how to replace either the multifunction controller (MFC) or 3216 tape controller in a NonStop Himalaya K-series server. The following instructions apply to NonStop Himalaya K10000 and K20000 servers with MF-8 I/O cabinets, and to NonStop Himalaya K2, K100, K200, K1000, K1000SE, K2000, and K2000SE servers. Replacing an MFC Complete procedures for replacing MFC logic boards and BICs are contained in the support guide for your system. See the following manuals: • • Himalaya K10000/K20000 Support Guide Himalaya K100 and K1000/K2000 Support Guide Replacing a 3216 Tape Controller The 3216 tape controller supports one or two tape drives. To troubleshoot controller problems using the LEDs on the 3216 controller logic board and BIC, see Troubleshooting the Modular Tape Subsystem (NonStop Himalaya K-Series Servers) on page 3-48. Before replacing either the logic board or the BIC, you must shut down the processes that use the tape drives and the paths to the controller. The following instructions apply to NonStop Himalaya K10000 and K20000 servers with MF-8 I/O cabinets, and to NonStop Himalaya K2, K100, K200, K1000, and K2000 servers. Only a trained service provider can replace a logic board or BIC in servers with MC-32 I/O cabinets. In the procedures that follow, the examples use the following device names: $TAPE1 The logical device name of the first cartridge tape drive configured on the 3216 controller. $TAPE2 The logical device name of the second cartridge tape drive configured on the 3216 controller. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6- 12 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Replacing a 3216 Tape Controller Preparing for Replacement Use this procedure to prepare for replacement: 1. Shut down the application software that uses the tape drives controlled by the controller to be replaced. 2. Use PUP to shut down the tape drives. 1>PUP #DOWN $TAPE1 #DOWN $TAPE2 #EXIT Removing a 3216 Logic Board Use this procedure to remove a 3216 logic board: 1. Open the cabinet door so that you can access the logic board section. Locate the slot that contains the logic board you are to remove. Logic boards are installed in slots 60 through 69 of system and I/O cabinets. 2. Loosen the thumbscrew on each board ejector. See Figure 1-6 on page 1-12. 3. Lift both ejectors at the same time to disconnect the logic board from the backplane. 4. Grasp the handle (or the ejectors if the board has no handle) of the logic board and slide the board partway out of the slot. (Hold the lower ejector out of the way so that it does not get caught on the fan below.) If the board has no handle, hold the board by the top and bottom of the board. If the board has a handle, use your other hand to support the weight of the board. Slide the board all the way out of the slot. Lay the board down on a flat surface such as a table. 5. Close the cabinet door. You are now ready to install a replacement 3216 logic board. Installing a 3216 Logic Board Use this procedure to install a 3216 logic board: 1. Open the cabinet door and locate the slot in which to install the logic board. Make sure that the logic board label matches the slot label (I/O). 2. Align the lower edge of the logic board with the slot. Then slide the logic board into the slot. Press on the front of the logic board so the connectors on the back of the board make contact with the backplane. Do not force the board into the slot. If the board does not seat easily, the board might be in the wrong slot or there might be a problem with the board or the backplane. 3. Press both ejectors into place at the same time to secure the board. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6- 13 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Replacing a 3216 Tape Controller 4. Tighten the thumbscrews on the ejectors. Be careful not to overtighten the thumbscrews. 5. Close the cabinet door. You are now ready to resume operations with the new 3216 logic board. See Resuming Operations on page 6-15. Removing a 3216 BIC Use this procedure to remove a 3216 BIC: 1. At the back of the cabinet, remove the cabinet cover and locate the BIC you are to remove. To determine the BIC slot number in either a system cabinet or I/O cabinet, see Identify the System and the Controller on page 2-4. 2. If a cable is connected to the BIC, attach a label to the cable. On the label, write the name of the BIC connector to which the cable is connected (such as J1 or J4). Then disconnect the cable from the BIC. 3. Loosen the thumbscrews that secure the BIC to the card cage. (See Figure 1-6 on page 1-12.) If a thumbscrew does not move with finger pressure, use a slotted screwdriver to loosen it. 4. Pull on the metal flange around the thumbscrews to remove the BIC from the cabinet. You are now ready to install a replacement 3216 BIC. Installing a 3216 BIC Use this procedure to install a 3216 BIC: 1. Locate the slot in which to install the BIC. Make sure the BIC label matches the slot label (I/O). BICs are keyed so you cannot install a BIC in the wrong slot. 2. Slide the BIC into the slot. Press on the front of the BIC so the connectors on the back of the BIC make contact with the backplane. 3. Make sure the BIC is seated firmly. If the system is powered on, the green indicator light on the BIC is lit and the red indicator light is unlit. Notify a service provider such as the GCSC if the red indicator light is lit. 4. Tighten the two thumbscrews to secure the BIC. 5. Remove the filler plug, if necessary, from the J1 connector, and reconnect the cable that was connected to the original BIC. Check the label on the cable to make sure that you reconnect the cable to the correct connector. You are now ready to resume operations with the new 3216 BIC. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6- 14 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Replacing a NonStop Himalaya S-Series Server Adapter Resuming Operations To resume operations after replacing either the 3216 logic board or BIC, you must bring up the paths to the controller and start up the processes using the tape drives. 1. If you have replaced the 3216 logic board, verify the firmware and test the new board (Steps 1a through 1c) before continuing to Steps 2 and 3. If you have replaced the 3216 BIC, perform Steps 1a and 1c and then Steps 2 and 3. a. Bring up the paths to the controller. For example: 1>PUP #UP $TAPE1 #UP $TAPE2 #EXIT b. Use the TMDS TAPE FIRMUP command to compare and update the firmware: 2>TMDS TAPE TAPE>FIRMUP OBJECT $TAPE1 This command compares the EEPROM firmware of the controller attached to $TAPE1 to the corresponding disk file on the current SYSnn in use. If the revision level of the EEPROM firmware is older than the revision level of the firmware in the disk file, FIRMUP updates the EEPROM firmware by loading the firmware code from the disk file into the EEPROM. For more information on the FIRMUP command, see the TAPE subsystem information in the TMDS Reference Manual. For online help, enter: TAPE>HELP FIRMUP c. Test the tape controller (this test requires you to load a scratch tape before beginning). If the test fails, notify a service provider such as the GCSC. For example: TAPE>TEST $TAPE1, TESTNAME DRIVE TAPE>EXIT 2. Start up the system software that was using the tape drives. 3. Restart the application software that was using the tape drives. Replacing a NonStop Himalaya S-Series Server Adapter Complete procedures for replacing a 6760 ServerNet device adapter with S-PIC or F-PIC are contained in the Himalaya S-Series Hardware Support Guide. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6- 15 Adding, Removing, and Replacing CRUs Replacing a NonStop Himalaya S-Series Server Adapter 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 6- 16 A Part Numbers Table A-1 lists the part numbers for customer-replaceable units (CRUs) and other components mentioned in this guide. Refer to the Compaq S-Series Service (CSSI) Web site for a more complete and current listing of CRU part numbers. On older part number labels, the leading character of the part number might be a number instead of a letter, as follows: Old Part Number New Part Number 0nnnnnn Tnnnnnn 1nnnnnn Unnnnnn Table A-1. Component Part Numbers (page 1 of 2) Component Part Number 3216 tape controller BIC (NonStop Himalaya K-series servers) T61701 3216 tape controller logic board (NonStop Himalaya K-series servers) T96789 5190 18-track tape drive T97673 5190 18-track tape drive with ACL T97671 5190 tape drive user’s kit U01011 5194 36-track tape drive U13644 5194 36-track tape drive with ACL U13643 5194 tape drive user’s kit U13858 6760 ServerNet device adapter (ServerNet/DA) U23201 6761 fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC) for ServerNet/DA U31967 6762 SCSI plug-in card (S-PIC) for ServerNet/DA U23218 ACL cartridge magazine U00188 Back-end board (BEB) assembly T96170 Cable for 3216 controller or 6761 F-PIC, 10-meter (33-foot) fiber-optic T64351 Cable for 3216 controller or 6761 F-PIC, 25-meter (82-foot) fiber-optic T64352 Cable for 3216 controller or 6761 F-PIC, 50-meter (164-foot) fiber-optic T64353 Cable for 3216 controller or 6761 F-PIC, 100-meter (328-foot) fiber-optic T64354 Cable for 3216 controller or 6761 F-PIC, 250-meter (820-foot) fiber-optic T64355 Cable for 3216 controller or 6761 F-PIC, 500-meter (1640-foot) fiber-optic T64356 Cable for MFC, 10-foot (3-meter) external SCSI T11936 Cable for MFC, 25-foot (8-meter) external SCSI T11937 Cable for PMF CRU, IOMF CRU, or 6762 S-PIC, 10-foot (3-meter) SCSI U31366 Cable for PMF CRU, IOMF CRU, or 6762 S-PIC, 25-foot (8-meter) SCSI U31367 Cable for PMF CRU, IOMF CRU, or 6762 S-PIC, 50-foot (16-meter) SCSI U31368 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 A- 1 Part Numbers Table A-1. Component Part Numbers (page 2 of 2) Component Part Number Cable for PMF CRU, IOMF CRU, or 6762 S-PIC, 75-foot (23-meter) SCSI U31369 Cable specification for building fiber-optic cables longer than 500 meters (up to 2 km) T96880 Cartridge, cleaning T30728 Cartridge, 36-track “thin tape” (IBM 3490E compatible) U13859 Cartridge, standard data (IBM 3480/3490 compatible) T51488 Daisy-chain cable, external SCSI, 1.2 feet (0.4 meters) T95886 Door latch U26652 Foam packing piece for ACL autoloader U02262 Magazine, tape drive U00188 MFC BIC, RS-232 (NonStop Himalaya K-series servers) T38218 MFC BIC, RS-232/SCSI (NonStop Himalaya K-series servers) T10893 MFC logic board (NonStop Himalaya K-series servers) T38957 Pedestal (7150 kit base, cap and FN kit) T65970 SCSI passthrough terminator U31491 SCSI terminator for tape drive CRU T13601 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 A- 2 B Blank Configuration Forms This appendix contains a blank 3216 Controller BIC Diagram and a blank MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram. For blank PMF CRU or IOMF CRU configuration forms, refer to the Himalaya S-Series Planning and Configuration Guide. For a blank 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem Configuration Form, refer to the 6760 ServerNet/DA Manual. You are authorized by Compaq Computer Corporation to photocopy these forms only for system configuration purposes. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 B- 1 3216 Controller BIC Diagram Controller Name Date / System Name Section Number (if applicable) Controller No. / Cabinet Number LB/BIC Slot Number Cable Part Number: Unit Number(s): Logical Device Name: / $ Physical Location of Device: Cable ID Tag: Comments: Product Number or Description of Device: J1 Daisy-Chain Connection Cable Part Number: Unit Number(s): Logical Device Name: $ Physical Location of Device: Cable ID Tag: Comments: Product Number or Description of Device: VSTA01.vsd MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram Controller No. Controller Name Date / System Name Section Number (if applicable) Cabinet Number / LB/BIC Slot Number Unit Number(s): %5 / Cable Part Number: $ Logical Device Name: Physical Location of Device: Cable ID Tag: Comments: Product Number or Description of Device: Cable Part Number: RMI J5 Logical Device Name: $ Physical Location of Device: Cable ID Tag: Comments: Product Number or Description of Device: J4 %0,%1 Logical Device Name: $ Unit Number(s): Physical Location of Device: Access Method: Cable Part Number: Cable ID Tag: Comments: J3 Product Number or Description of Device: Unit Number(s): %4,%5 Logical Device and Subdevice Name: J2 $ .# Physical Location of Device: Interface: RS-232 Cable Part Number: or CL 13686 (Circle one) and Cable ID Tag: Comments: Product Number or Description of Device: J1 Unit Number(s): %2,%3 Logical Device and Subdevice Name: $ .# Physical Location of Device: Interface: RS-232 Cable Part Number: or 13686 CL (Circle one) and Cable ID Tag: Comments: Product Number or Description of Device: VSTA02.vsd Safety and Compliance Regulatory Compliance Statements The following warning and regulatory compliance statements apply to the products documented by this manual. WARNING. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. The use of shielded cables is required in order for this equipment to meet the FCC emission limits. CISPR Compliance Statement The 3216 tape controller and 3681 multifunction controller comply with the requirements of CISPR 22 (EN55 022) for Class B Information Technology Equipment (ITE). The 519x Tape Drive Cabinet complies with the requirements of CISPR 22 (EN 55 022) for Class A Information Technology Equiment (ITE). In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Bescheinigung des Herstellers/Importeurs Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daß das Gerät die Compaq Productgruppe 3216/519x und 3681(MFC)/519x in Übereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der BMPT-AmtsblVfg 243/1991 funk-enstört ist. Der vorschriftsmäßige Betrieb mancher Geräte (z. B. Meßsender) kann allerdings gewissen Einschränkungen unterliegen. Beachten Sie deshalb die Hinweise in der Bedienungsanleitung. Dem Zentralamt für Zulassungen im Femmeldewesen wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerätes angezeigt und die Berechtigung zur Überprüfung der Serie auf die Einhaltung der Bestimmungen eingeräumt. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Statements -1 Consumer Safety Statements Safety and Compliance Canadian Compliance Statement This class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règelment sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. UL Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. CSA Certified by Canadian Standards Association TUV-GS approved by TUV Rheinland Consumer Safety Statements The following statements are presented in English and French to satisfy Canadian Standards Association (CSA) safety requirements. The Drive CRU The cartridge tape drive and its power supply come packaged in a customerreplaceable unit (CRU). The CRU allows quick and easy replacement of drives that require service. CRU (Unité remplaçable par l'utilisateur) de l'unité L'unité de cartouche à bande magnétique et son bloc d'alimentation sont fournis en une unité remplaçable par l'utilisateur (CRU). La CRU permet un remplacement rapide et aisé des unités nécessitant un entretien. Securing the Cabinet To secure the cabinet, lower the cabinet legs on the pedestal. The legs are located next to each caster. Turn each leg counterclockwise with your fingers until it touches the floor. Using a 15/16-inch open-ended wrench, turn the nut until the pad is firmly on the floor. Fixation de l'armoire Pour fixer l'armoire, abaissez les pieds de celle-ci sur le piédestal. Les pieds sont situés à côté des roulettes. Faites manuellement tourner chaque pied dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre jusqu'à ce qu'ils touchent le sol. En utilisant une clef de 15/16 pouces, faites tourner l'écrou jusqu'à ce que le patin soit fermement sur le sol. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Statements -2 Consumer Safety Statements Safety and Compliance Service Clearance Note the following position information before beginning the installation: You should allow a clearance of 60 to 90 centimeters (24 to 36 inches) at the front and 90 centimeters (36 inches) at the rear of the cabinet for adequate ventilation and servicing. Note. The modular storage system can be serviced only from the rear. Dégagement pour l'entretien Notez les informations suivantes relatives à la position, avant de commencer l'installation : Vous devez laisser un dégagement de 60 à 90 centimètres à l'avant de l'armoire, et 90 centimètres à l'arrière, pour permettre une ventilation et un entretien corrects. Remarque. L'entretien du sous-système 5190/5194 ne peut être fait que par l'arrière. Procedures That Require a Service Provider While some simple replacement procedures for the modular tape subsystem can be performed by users at the installation site, the following procedures must be performed by a service provider trained by Compaq: • • • • • • • Troubleshooting or repairing the 5190 or 5194 drive CRU Troubleshooting or repairing the automatic cartridge loader (ACL) Disassembling the module Adding a second drive CRU to an installed module Adding an ACL to an installed module Adding a module to an installed modular storage system stack Extracting a cartridge tape from a failed drive Any troubleshooting or repair of the drive CRU or ACL can be done only at the factory by a service provider trained by Compaq. To contact a service provider, call the Compaq Global Customer Support Center (GCSC). WARNING. With the ACL option, the 5190 or 5194 drive CRU can weigh up to 34 kilograms (75 pounds). To avoid injury, always use at least two people to lift the drive CRU out of the module. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Statements -3 Consumer Safety Statements Safety and Compliance Procédures nécessitant l'intervention d'un ingénieur clientèle Alors que certaines procédures simples de remplacement de pièces du sous-système 5190/5194 peuvent être effectuées par les utilisateurs sur le site d'installation, les procédures suivantes doivent être effectuées par un ingénieur clientèle (CE) formé par Compaq : • • • • • • • Dépannage ou réparation de l'unité CRU (unité remplaçable par l'utilisateur) du 5190/5194 Dépannage ou réparation du chargeur automatique de cartouche (ACL) Démontage du module Ajout d'une deuxième unité CRU à un module déjà en place Ajout d'un ACL (chargeur automatique de cartouche) à un module déjà en place Ajout d'un module à un système de stockage modulaire déjà en place Retrait d'une cartouche à bande magnétique d'une unité défectueuse Tout dépannage ou réparation de l'unité CRU ou ACL ne peut être fait qu'en usine par un ingénieur clientèle (CE) formé par Compaq. Pour contacter un CE, appelez le Centre d'assistance permanente de Compaq (GCSC) ou votre représentant Compaq. AVERTISSEMENT. Avec l'option d'ACL (chargeur automatique de cartouche), l'unité CRU (unité remplaçable par l'utilisateur) du 5190/5194 peut peser jusqu'à 34 kilogrammes. Pour éviter toute blessure, utilisez toujours au moins deux personnes pour retirer l'unité CRU du module. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Statements -4 Glossary 6760 ServerNet device adapter (ServerNet/DA). See ServerNet device adapter (ServerNet/DA). 6761 F-PIC. See fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC). 6762 S-PIC. See SCSI plug-in card (S-PIC). ACL. See automatic cartridge loader (ACL). ADAPTER object type. The Subsystem Control Facility (SCF) object type for all adapters attached to your system. autoloader. An elevator mechanism inside the automatic cartridge loader (ACL) that extracts cartridge tapes from the cartridge magazine and loads them into the tape drive. automatic cartridge loader (ACL). A device that stores multiple cartridge tapes and loads them automatically, one at a time, into a tape drive. back-end board (BEB). A circuit board that translates fiber-optic signals from a 3216 controller or 6760 ServerNet device adapter into small computer system interface (SCSI) commands and information for a tape drive. The BEB is housed in a cage-like sheet-metal enclosure and plugs into one of the 50-pin SCSI ports on the back of a tape drive customer-replaceable unit (CRU). backplane interconnect card (BIC). A small circuit board that plugs into the backplane and connects the system to external devices or cabinets. BICs are installed in the BIC section in the rear of Compaq NonStop Himalaya K-series system and I/O cabinets. BACKUP. A utility for the Compaq NonStop Himalaya range of servers that creates a backup copy of one or more disk files on magnetic tape. See also RESTORE. BEB. See back-end board (BEB). beginning-of-tape (BOT) mark. A data byte sequence that indicates the beginning of the space available for data recording on a cartridge tape. This sequence appears within 1.34 meters (53 inches) from the leader block. BIC. See backplane interconnect card (BIC). BOT. See beginning-of-tape (BOT) mark. bpi. Bits/inch. A unit of measure used to measure tape drive recording density when considering one track of a magnetic tape. The abbreviation bpi can stand for bytes/inch if one inch of the full width of the tape is considered. (Bits are recorded in parallel.) 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Glossary- 1 buffer Glossary buffer. A block of memory or a storage device that temporarily stores data being transferred from one device to another. The buffer compensates for the different processing rates of the devices. cartridge magazine. A removable plastic assembly that holds seven cartridge tapes for automatic loading and unloading. The magazine fits inside the automatic cartridge loader (ACL) and supplies tapes to the autoloader. cartridge tape. A self-contained plastic shell holding a spool of chromium-dioxide-coated tape. Tape is nested in the cartridge by a spring-loaded mechanism that exposes the tape only when the cartridge is loaded into a drive. cartridge tape drive. A tape drive that uses a magnetic tape, on supply and take-up reels, completely enclosed in a plastic case. A cartridge tape drive can be used to load system software and applications and to archive similar data. CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE. A type of tape DEFINE for use with the Distributed Systems Management/Tape Catalog (DSM/TC) operator interface (MEDIACOM). Unlike a CLASS TAPE DEFINE, a CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE has catalog and compression attributes. cleaning cartridge. A cartridge used to clean the tape drive recording heads. A cleaning cartridge is similar to other cartridge tapes, but it contains a cleaning ribbon instead of magnetic tape. Compaq NonStop Himalaya K-series servers. The set of servers in the Compaq NonStop Himalaya range of servers having product numbers beginning with the letter “K.” These servers run the Compaq NonStop Kernel operating system, but they do not implement the ServerNet architecture. Compaq NonStop Himalaya S-series servers. The set of servers in the Compaq NonStop Himalaya range of servers having product numbers beginning with the letter “S.” These servers implement the ServerNet architecture and run the Compaq NonStop Kernel operating system. Compaq NonStop Transaction Management Facility (TMF) subsystem. The major component of the Compaq NonStop Transaction Manager/MP (TM/MP) product, which protects databases in online transaction processing (OLTP) environments. To furnish this service, the TMF subsystem manages database transactions, keeps track of database activity through audit trails, provides database recovery methods, and supports online dumps. Formerly called Transaction Monitoring Facility (TMF). Compaq Tandem Maintenance and Diagnostic System (TMDS). A diagnostic software tool for Compaq NonStop Himalaya K-series servers that uses the maintenance and diagnostic subsystem (MDS) to record, report, and diagnose system malfunctions. Compaq TSM package. A software product for Compaq NonStop Himalaya S-series servers that provides the information needed to perform functions such as querying resources and testing, provides notification of problems on the system, and allows 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Glossary- 2 compression Glossary local or remote access to the system for service and maintenance. The TSM package performs the same role as that of Compaq Tandem Maintenance and Diagnostic System (TMDS), Syshealth, and Remote Maintenance Interface (RMI) on K-series servers. compression. See Improved Data Recording Capability (IDRC). Configuration Utility Program (COUP). A utility used on D-series and earlier releases to make online changes to the configuration of devices and controllers. COUP is part of the Dynamic System Configuration (DSC) facility. On G-series releases, similar functions are performed by the Subsystem Control Facility (SCF). controller. See I/O controller and ServerNet addressable controller (SAC). COUP. See Configuration Utility Program (COUP). CRU. See customer-replaceable unit (CRU). customer-replaceable unit (CRU). A unit that can be replaced in the field either by customers or by qualified personnel trained by Compaq. CRUs are divided into the categories of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 according to the risk of causing a system outage if the documented replacement procedure is not followed correctly and how much CRU-replacement training or experience is advisable. daisy-chaining. Connecting two units serially to a controller or adapter. DEFINE. A Compaq Tandem Advanced Command Language (TACL) command you can use to specify a named set of attributes and values to pass to a process. density. The number of bits or characters that can be recorded in a given length of tape, expressed in bits/inch (bpi). The 5190 and 5194 tape drives read and write at a density of 38,000 bpi. device ID. A number that identifies the drive address to which a Compaq NonStop Himalaya system can send data or from which the system can receive data. The 5190 and 5194 tape drives use a device ID of 5 (the default device ID) unless two drives are attached by means of daisy chaining, in which case the device IDs are 4 and 5. On NonStop Himalaya K-series servers, the device ID of a tape drive must match the unit number specified for the drive by the Configuration Utility Program (COUP) or in the CONFTEXT configuration file. Distributed Systems Management/Software Configuration Manager (DSM/SCM). A graphical user interface (GUI)-based program that installs new software and creates a new Compaq NonStop Kernel operating system. DSM/SCM creates a new software revision and activates the new software on the target system. drive CRU. See tape drive CRU. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Glossary- 3 drive state Glossary drive state. The online or offline state of a tape drive. A 5190 or 5194 tape drive can be in one of four READY states or two NOT READY states. DSC. See Dynamic System Configuration (DSC). DSM/SCM. See Distributed Systems Management/Software Configuration Manager (DSM/SCM). Dynamic System Configuration (DSC). A utility used in D-series and earlier releases to make online changes to the configuration of devices and controllers. Its interactive utility is called the Configuration Utility Program (COUP). In G-series releases, similar functions are performed by Subsystem Control Facility (SCF). end-of-tape (EOT) mark. A data byte sequence that indicates the end of the space available for data recording on a cartridge tape. This sequence appears more than 4.3 meters (169 inches) from the tape-to-hub junction. EOT. See end-of-tape (EOT) mark. fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC). A plug-in card (PIC) for the 6760 ServerNet device adapter (ServerNet/DA) that uses a fiber-optic interface to connect a Compaq NonStop Himalaya S-series system to external disk drives and to some tape drives that contain a back-end board (BEB) that translates fiber-optic signals from the F-PIC into SCSI commands and information for the tape drive. See also plug-in card (PIC) and SCSI plug-in card (S-PIC). fiber-optic ServerNet addressable controller (F-SAC). A ServerNet addressable controller (SAC) that is contained within a fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC). field-replaceable unit (FRU). A unit that can be replaced in the field only by qualified personnel trained by Compaq and cannot be replaced by customers. A unit is classified as a FRU because of safety hazards such as weight, size, sharp edges, or electrical potential; contractual agreements with suppliers; or national or international standards. See also customer-replaceable unit (CRU). file mark. See tape mark. File Utility Program (FUP). A utility for the Compaq NonStop Himalaya range of servers that performs a variety of operations on files, including copying, creating, duplicating, renaming, and securing. firmware. Code in memory that is necessary for the power-up initialization and communication with a host or device. The software for components of the ServerNet architecture (for example, an adapter) is called firmware. Some firmware for ServerNet components is downloaded when the system or component is loaded. F-PIC. See fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC). FRU. See field-replaceable unit (FRU) 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Glossary- 4 F-SAC Glossary F-SAC. See fiber-optic ServerNet addressable controller (F-SAC). FUP. See File Utility Program (FUP). group. The set of all objects accessible by a pair of service processors (SPs) located in the processor multifunction (PMF) customer-replaceable unit (CRU). In a NonStop Himalaya S-series server, a system enclosure has exactly one group. IDRC. See Improved Data Recording Capability (IDRC). Improved Data Recording Capability (IDRC). A method for writing compressed data. Data compression is a standard feature of the 5190 and 5194 tape drives that enables the drive to store twice as much data on a cartridge tape. IDRC is also known as Enhanced Data Recording Capabilty (EDRC). I/O controller. The combination of a logic board (LB) and a backplane interconnect card (BIC) that controls computer I/O operations on Compaq NonStop Himalaya K-series servers for a particular set of devices, such as disks, tapes, terminals, or communications lines. ips. Inches/second, a measurement of tape speed. KB. See kilobyte (KB). kilobyte (KB). A unit of measurement equal to 1024 bytes. See also megabyte (MB). labeled tape. A tape with a tape label. If a tape has no standard label, it is considered unlabeled. See also tape label. LB. See logic board (LB). leader block. A plastic end piece on a cartridge tape that allows the threader arm of the tape drive to pick up the tape and wind it through the tape path inside the drive. A latch on the edge of the cartridge holds the leader block firmly in place to protect the tape when the cartridge is not in use. LED. See light-emitting diode (LED). light-emitting diode (LED). A semiconductor device that emits light from its surface. Indicator lights are composed of LEDs. The 5190 and 5194 tape drives, the automatic cartridge loader (ACL), and the back-end board (BEB) use LEDs to indicate operating status. load. (1) To transfer the operating system image or a program from disk to a computer’s memory so that the operating system or program can run. (2) To insert a tape into a tape drive, which prepares it for a tape operation (read or write). If a 5190 or 5194 tape drive does not have an automatic cartridge loader (ACL), tapes must be loaded by hand. If a 5190 or 5194 tape drive has an ACL, loading is performed by the ACL autoloader. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Glossary- 5 logic board (LB) Glossary logic board (LB). A printed wiring assembly (PWA) on which computer circuits (chips and wiring) are mounted. Examples of logic boards are the processor and memory board (PMB) on Compaq NonStop Himalaya S-series servers and the 3216 tape controller logic board on Compaq NonStop Himalaya K-series servers). MB. See megabyte (MB). megabyte (MB). A unit of measurement equal to 1,048,576 bytes (1024 kilobytes). See also kilobyte (KB). memory dump. A copy of the memory of a processor. The dump can be to tape or disk. message panel. A series of eight light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the front panel of a 5190 or 5194 tape drive or automatic cartridge loader (ACL). The message panel displays alphanumeric characters or symbols that combine to form status messages. modular storage system. A framework for stacking multiple Compaq storage devices. The modular storage system consists of low-cost, common-form-factor modules that can be vertically stacked in an external support structure. Devices can include cartridge tape, streaming tape, and disk modules. A maximum of two modules (for instance, six cartridge tape drives) can be stacked in one support structure that makes up a modular storage system. modular tape subsystem. A subsystem that contains a tape drive customer-replaceable unit (CRU) packaged in a stackable module of a modular storage system and a controller or adapter that communicates with a Compaq NonStop Himalaya system. module. (1) A single storage compartment or position in a modular storage system. The tape drive module can house two tape drive customer-replaceable units (CRUs). (2) A set of components sharing a common interconnection, such as a backplane. A module is a subset of a group, and it is usually contained in an enclosure. In a Compaq NonStop Himalaya S-series server, a group contains exactly one module. mount. To place a cartridge tape in the automatic cartridge loader (ACL) cartridge magazine of a 5190 or 5194 tape drive. Once cartridge tapes are mounted in the cartridge magazine and the cartridge magazine is placed in the ACL, the autoloader can load the cartridge tapes from the cartridge magazine into the tape drive. NOT READY state. The offline state of a 5190 or 5194 tape drive. NT RDYU and NT RDYF are the two NOT READY states. offline. The state of a tape drive in which the drive cannot execute read or write commands from the host computer system. Contrast with online. online. The state of a tape drive in which the drive can execute read or write commands from the host computer system. Contrast with offline. online dump. To copy specified database tables and files onto disk or tape for later use. If a database is damaged, online dumps allow the file recovery process to restore the 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Glossary- 6 Peripheral Utility Program (PUP) Glossary tables and files to disk and then apply the audit trail images to reconstruct the files. Online dumps are supported by the Compaq NonStop Transaction Management Facility (TMF) subsystem. Peripheral Utility Program (PUP). A utility used in D-series and earlier releases to manage disks and other peripheral devices. In G-series releases, similar functions are performed by the Subsystem Control Facility (SCF). PIC. See plug-in card (PIC). plug-in card (PIC). A replaceable component that provides a unique function when installed in a customer-replaceable unit (CRU) or field-replaceable unit (FRU). PICs for modular ServerNet expansion boards (MSEBs) and I/O multifunction (IOMF) 2 CRUs provide a choice of connection media for attaching ServerNet cables. PMF CRU. See processor multifunction (PMF) CRU. processor multifunction (PMF) CRU. (1) A Compaq NonStop Himalaya S-series customer-replaceable unit (CRU) that contains a power supply, service processor (SP), ServerNet router 1, Ethernet controller, three ServerNet addressable controllers (SACs), and a processor and memory system in a single unit. The PMF CRU consists of three subassemblies: the processor and memory board (PMB), the multifunction I/O board (MFIOB), and the power supply subassembly. (2) A collective term for both PMF CRUs and PMF 2 CRUs when a distinction between the two types of CRUs is not required. PUP. See Peripheral Utility Program (PUP). READY state. The online state of a 5190 or 5194 tape drive. BOT RDYU, BOT RDYF, READY U, and READY F are the four READY states. RESTORE. A utility for the Compaq NonStop Himalaya range of servers that copies files from a backup tape to disk. See also BACKUP. SAC. See ServerNet addressable controller (SAC). SCF. See Subsystem Control Facility (SCF). scratch tape. A labeled tape with an expired date. Such a tape volume can be used for making dumps or random file transfers. SCSI. See small computer system interface (SCSI). SCSI ID. See device ID. SCSI passthrough terminator. A bus-terminating plug connected between a cable and the external connector of a customer-replaceable unit (CRU). The SCSI passthrough terminator contains the necessary termination resistors required by the SCSI bus. See also terminator. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Glossary- 7 SCSI plug-in card (S-PIC) Glossary SCSI plug-in card (S-PIC). A plug-in card (PIC) for the 6760 ServerNet device adapter (ServerNet D/A) that uses a small computer system interface (SCSI) interface to connect 9490, 5150, and 519x tape drives to a Compaq NonStop Himalaya S-series system. See also plug-in card (PIC) and fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC). ServerNet addressable controller (SAC). On Compaq NonStop Himalaya S-series servers, an I/O controller that is uniquely addressable by a ServerNet ID in the ServerNet fabric. A SAC is typically implemented on some portion of a processor multifunction (PMF) customer-replaceable unit (CRU), an I/O multifunction (IOMF) CRU, or a ServerNet adapter. ServerNet/DA. See ServerNet device adapter (ServerNet/DA). ServerNet device adapter (ServerNet/DA). A ServerNet adapter that controls external devices. The 6760 ServerNet/DA contains up to four ServerNet addressable controllers (SACs), each of which can control either disk drives or tape drives. service provider. (1) A person trained and qualified to service field-replaceable units (FRUs). (2) An organization, such as the Global Customer Support Center (GCSC), that helps you resolve problems with your Compaq NonStop Himalaya server. SETMODE procedure call. A Guardian procedure call that requests system services to set device-dependent characteristics. small computer system interface (SCSI). controller to access a device. An ANSI-standard protocol used by a S-PIC. See SCSI plug-in card (S-PIC). streaming tape operation. Continuous tape motion by a tape drive, as opposed to start/stop tape operation. Subsystem Control Facility (SCF). An interactive interface for configuring, controlling, and collecting information from subsystems and objects. On G-series releases, SCF enables you to configure and reconfigure devices, processes, and some system variables while your Compaq NonStop Himalaya S-series server is online. SYSGENR. The system generation program that generates a customized version of the Compaq NonStop Kernel operating system. tape bootstrap. The program on a system image tape (SIT) that reads the rest of the SIT during tape load and writes it to the system disk. tape DEFINE. A named set of attributes and values that specifies information about a tape file. There are two types of tape DEFINEs: CLASS TAPE DEFINEs and CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINEs. tape drive. A device that moves magnetic tape past magnetic read/write heads, which read data from or write data to the tape. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Glossary- 8 tape drive CRU Glossary tape drive CRU. A customer-replaceable unit (CRU) that consists of a tape drive, that drive’s power supply, and a front panel with operator buttons. The tape drive CRU facilitates quick and easy replacement of a drive that requires servicing. tape dump. To copy the memory of a processor to tape. tape label. A record at the beginning of a tape that identifies the tape volume and the files it contains. Compaq NonStop Himalaya systems support two standard tape-label formats: ANSI and IBM-MVS. tape library. A collection of magnetic tapes that store information offline. Typically, backups and infrequently used databases are stored in a tape library. tape load. A system load. A tape load is the process of reading a system image tape (SIT) and writing it to the system disk. Performing a tape load from a SIT to restore the system image files to the $SYSTEM disk is generally not recommended. Perform a tape load only with the advice of the Global Customer Support Center (GCSC) or your service provider. Loading from a tape reinitializes the disk directory. tape mark. A byte sequence written by the host system to separate sections of data (individual files, for example) on a magnetic tape. A tape mark is sometimes called a file mark. TAPE object type. The Subsystem Control Facility (SCF) object type for all tape drives attached to your system. tape process. A running program that performs the actual reading of and writing to tapes. The tape process also reads the labels on mounted tapes and sends the information to $ZSVR, the server process for the labeled-tape subsystem. terminator. A resistor connected to a signal wire in a bus or network for the purpose of impedance matching to prevent reflections. SCSI chains, Ethernet cables, and some LocalTalk wiring configurations require terminators. TMDS. See Compaq Tandem Maintenance and Diagnostic System (TMDS). TMF subsystem. See Compaq NonStop Transaction Management Facility (TMF) subsystem. track. A longitudinal (lengthwise) region of a tape on which data can be stored using magnetic signals. TSM package. See Compaq TSM package. unit number. A number that represents a connection between a controller and a tape drive on a Compaq NonStop K-series server. The unit number of a tape drive in a modular tape subsystem is specified when the tape drive is added to the system configuration using either the Configuration Utility Program (COUP) or the Subsystem Control Facility (SCF). 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Glossary- 9 unlabeled tape Glossary unlabeled tape. A tape with no standard tape label. See also tape label. unload. To rewind a tape and eject the tape from a tape drive. $ZSVR. The name of the server process for the labeled-tape subsystem. 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Glossary -10 Index Numbers 18-track tape drive See Cartridge tape drive 3216 tape controller See also Fiber-optic cable BIC diagram 2-4 fault LED on (illustration) 1-12 installing BIC for 3-21, 6-14 installing logic board for 3-21, 6-13 number of CRUs supported 3-5 part numbers 2-4 power-on LED on (illustration) 1-12 removing BIC from 6-14 removing logic board from 6-13 replacing 6-12 resuming operations on 6-15 troubleshooting 3-48 3480 IBM tape format 1-2, 1-4, 1-5, 1-6 3490 IBM tape format 1-2, 1-4, 1-5 3490E IBM tape format 1-2, 1-4, 1-6 36-track tape drive See Cartridge tape drive 5190 tape drive See Cartridge tape drive 5190/5194 module See Module 5194 tape drive See Cartridge tape drive 6760 ServerNet device adapter configuration form 2-23 connecting a fiber-optic cable to 3-14 connecting a SCSI cable to 3-15 device IDs for 3-5 number of CRUs supported 3-5 releases supporting 1-2 replacing 6-15 SCF name for 2-23 6760 ServerNet device adapter (continued) TSM actions for 5-7 TSM test procedures for 3-39 6761 fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC) Himalaya S-series component 1-13 installation 3-15 part number A-1 6762 SCSI plug-in card (S-PIC) Himalaya S-series component 1-13 installation 3-15 part number A-1 A A code on cartridge position indicator 4-10 AC power connecting and routing cord 3-27 cord 3-10 cord length 3-7 on/off switch 3-39 receptacle 3-26 requirements 3-9 supply 3-9 ACL cleaning cartridge See Cleaning cartridge backups requiring multiple cartridges 4-39 carriage 4-15 cartridge magazine See Cartridge magazine cartridge position indicator 4-10 described 1-7 foam packing 3-18, 3-39, 6-8 front panel 4-6 loading cartridges 4-15 magazine door 4-12, 4-20 message panel 4-8 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index -1 B Index ACL (continued) operating 4-5/4-20 operating mode 4-18 operator buttons 4-9 power-up sequence 3-41 rewinding tape 4-19 sequential loading of cartridges 4-16 status indicator LEDs 4-8 tape position LEDs 4-7 troubleshooting 3-48, 3-50, 3-52 unloading cartridges 4-18 unlocking the magazine door 4-20 ADD command, SCF 2-25 ALLPROCESSORS paragraph, modifying 2-18, 4-42 ALTER command, SCF 2-26 Asterisk (*) code, on cartridge position indicator 4-10 on message panel 3-41 ATTN (attention) LED 4-8, 4-23 AUTO LED 4-8 Automatic cartridge loader (ACL) See ACL B BACKUP utility 3-47, 4-38 Back-end board (BEB) See BEB BEB description 1-12, 1-16 enclosure 1-12, 1-16 illustration 3-26 installing 3-25, 6-4 LEDs 1-12, 1-16, 6-2 removing 6-3 replacing 6-2 static-sensitive components 3-25, 6-4 troubleshooting 3-49, 6-2 BIC diagram 2-1, 2-4 Block size, choosing 4-54 BLOCKSIZE option, Backup utility 4-40 BOT LED 4-7, 4-23 BOT RDYF message 4-29 state 4-30 BOT RDYU message 4-29 state 4-30 Buffered mode and error reporting 4-55 C C code on cartridge position indicator 4-10 Cable specification See Extender for fiber-optic cable Cables See also Fiber-optic cable See also SCSI cable 2-km specification 1-12, 1-16 extender for fiber-optic cable 1-13, 1-16 part numbers for A-1 routing 1-8 Carriage, ACL 4-15 CARRIER CLASHES message 4-15 Cartridge magazine capacity 1-7 cartridge locking bar 4-16 door 4-12, 4-20 file-protect switch 4-17 mounting cartridges in 4-14 placing in ACL carriage 4-15 removing cartridges from 4-16 removing from ACL 4-12 slot numbers 4-14 unlocking door 4-20 using 4-11 Cartridge position indicator 4-10 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index -2 C Index Cartridge tape drive 1-2 See also ACL cartridge entry slot (illustrated) 4-22 cleaning 4-27 configuration 3216 controller 3-13 F-PIC 3-14 MFC 3-12 PMF CRU or IOMF CRU 3-14 S-PIC 3-15 CRU service class 3-1 differentiating between 5190 and 5194 cartridges 1-4 front panel 4-22 loading and unloading mechanism 1-2 loading cartridges in 4-15, 4-24 message panel 4-23 operating with an ACL 4-5/4-21 operating without an ACL 4-22/4-26 operator buttons 4-23 placement within module 3-6 power-up sequence 3-41 rewinding tape 4-19, 4-26 status indicator LEDs 4-8, 4-23 tape position LEDs 4-23 unloading cartridges from 4-18, 4-25 Cartridge tapes 1-3 cleaning cartridge See Cleaning cartridge compatibility 1-4 damaged 4-4 description 1-3 dimensions 1-3 environmental requirements 4-2 extended 1-4 file-protect thumbwheel 4-3 handling 4-2 labeled tapes 1-5 leader block See Leader block loading 4-15, 4-24 recording format 1-3 rewinding 4-19, 4-26 scratch tapes 1-5 standard 1-4 storage capacity 1-3 storing 4-3 tape-label formats 1-5 unlabeled tapes 4-42, 4-43 unloading 4-18, 4-25 viewing the contents of 4-40 Cartridges 1-3 See also Cartridge tapes See also Cleaning cartridge Check codes 4-29, 4-30, 4-31 CHK 98 check code 3-51, 3-53 CHK F8 check code 4-28 Checking the device ID 3-41 CHK 98 check code 3-51, 3-53 CHK F8 check code 4-28 CLASS TAPE DEFINE 4-50 CLASS TAPECATALOG DEFINE 4-50 Cleaning a tape drive 4-27 Cleaning cartridge checking for installation of 4-5, 4-28 CHK F8 check code when using 4-28 described 1-3, 4-4 installing in ACL 3-44 removing from ACL 6-11 replacing in ACL 6-10 using 4-27 CLEANING message 4-29 Codes on cartridge position indicator 4-10 Command summary, TMDS 5-2 Common operations 4-1 COMP (compression) LED 4-8, 4-23, 4-44 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index -3 C Index Compaq Tandem Maintenance and Diagnostic System (TMDS) See TMDS TAPE subsystem Compaq TSM package See TSM package Compatibility, tape cartridge types 1-4 Components, part numbers A-1 Compression always on for 5194 tape drive 4-52 checking mode 4-45 description 1-5 labeled and unlabeled tapes 4-50 LED 4-8, 4-23, 4-44 overriding the system default 4-50, 4-55 setting in configuration file 4-46 systemwide default 4-49 using COUP 4-47 using DEFINEs 4-50 using MEDIACOM 4-49 using SCF 4-53 using SETMODE 4-52 using 4-44/4-53 COMPRESSION attribute of SCF ALTER command 4-52 Configuration considerations 2-13 Configuration forms See also Diagrams Configuration form 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem ??/2-23 Configuration forms 6760 Adapter and Modular Tape Subsystem 2-23 IOMF CRU 2-20, 2-22 PMF CRU 2-20/2-21 Configuration Utility Program (COUP) See COUP Configuring 6760 adapter, done automatically 2-23 modular tape subsystem 2-25/2-28 CONFTEXT file, modifying 2-13/2-18 CONTROL operations 4-54 Control panel 4-6, 4-22 CONTROLLERS paragraph, modifying 2-15 Copper SCSI cable See SCSI cable Copy Memory:Tape task considerations 4-56 COUP ADD command 2-8, 2-9, 2-10 and DSC 2-7 ASSUME command 2-8, 2-9, 2-10 backing up OSIMAGE and OSCONFIG files 2-7 compression attribute 2-11, 4-48 defining and adding a controller 2-9 defining and adding a logical controller 2-8 defining and adding a tape device 2-10 DELETE command 2-12 removing a tape device 2-12 SET command 2-8, 2-9, 2-10 SHOW command 2-10 START command 2-11, 3-45 starting a tape device 2-11, 3-45 unit numbers 2-10 CRU See also 6760 adapter See also Drive CRU See also PMF CRU identifying by group, module, slot 2-19 part numbers A-1 replacement 6-1 service class 3-1 Customer-replaceable unit (CRU) See CRU 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index -4 D Index D Daisy-chain cable device IDs for 3-5 K-series servers 2-5, 6-6 description 1-12, 1-16 illustration of 3-13 on 3216 controller 3-12 S-series servers caution 1-13, 3-4 Data compression See Compression DEFINEs 4-50 DELETE command, SCF 2-27 Device ID and drive placement 3-6 assigned by Compaq 2-13 setting or checking 3-41/3-44 Diagnostic commands 5-2 Diagrams See also Configuration forms 3216 Controller BIC 2-4/2-6 MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC 2-1/2-4 Differential SCSI port See SCSI port Dimensions cartridge tape 1-3 module 3-7 DOOR LOCK LED 3-41, 4-8, 4-20 DOWN command, PUP 4-34 Download microcode 5-2 Drive configurations 3-12 Drive CRU See also Cartridge tape drive description 1-1 function 1-1 placement within module 3-4 removing 6-5 replacing 6-5, 6-8 returning to Compaq 6-10 weight 6-5 DSC 2-7 See also COUP Dump memory to tape using TMDS 4-56 memory to tape using TSM package 4-57, 5-7 memory, considerations 2-14 online using TMF subsystem 4-43 Dynamic System Configuration (DSC) 2-7 See also COUP E E code, on cartridge position indicator 4-10 End piece, base of module 3-17 Environmental requirements cartridge tapes 4-2 tape drive module 3-9 EOF and file size for cartridge tapes 4-44 EOT LED 4-7, 4-24 EOT message 4-29 Error messages 4-29 buffered mode and error reporting 4-55 responding to 4-31 unloading cartridges 4-19 EXERCISE command, TMDS 3-45, 5-2 Extender for fiber-optic cable 1-13, 1-16 Extrusion guides and tie wraps 3-26 F F code, on cartridge position indicator 4-10 Fiber-optic cable See also 6761 fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC) connecting to 3216 BIC 3-35 to BEB 3-28 installation 3-9 lengths supported 1-12, 1-16 maximum bend radius 3-29 part numbers for A-1 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index -5 G Index Fiber-optic cable (continued) same for K-series and S-series servers 3-9 File-protect switch on cartridge magazine 4-17 thumbwheel on ACL cartridge 4-3, 4-15 FIRMINFO command, TMDS 5-2 FLASH command, TMDS 5-2, 5-4 Floor space requirements 3-7 Foam packing piece in ACL part number A-2 removing from ACL 3-18, 3-39, 6-8 reusing 6-10 Footprint of modular storage subsystem 3-7 F-PIC See 6761 fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC) G Group, module, and slot 2-19 identifying CRUs by 2-19 H H code, on cartridge position indicator 4-10 HELP command, TMDS 5-3 Host system, operator message type 4-29 I Identifying CRUs by group, module, slot 2-19 IDRC See also Compression compatibility with IBM 1-5 standard feature 4-44 Improved Data Recovery Capability (IDRC) See IDRC INFO command, SCF 2-26, 2-27 Installation 3-19/3-22 3216 BIC 3-21, 6-14 3216 logic board 3-21, 6-13 certification of 3-9 cleaning cartridge for ACL 3-44 connecting tape drive to host system 3-22/3-39 customer 1-1 drive configurations 3-12 MFC RS-232/SCSI BIC 3-19 overview 3-2 placing the system online after 3-39 planning for 3-4 task summary 3-2 Interface components 1-10 IOMF CRU configuration forms for 2-20 connecting copper SCSI cable to 3-36 I/O multifunction (IOMF) CRU See IOMF CRU L Labeled tapes 1-5 Labeled-tape processing 2-18, 4-42 LABELTAPE attribute, SCF ALTER command 4-44 Leader block damaged 4-4 function 1-3 repair kit 4-2, 4-4 LEDs ATTN (attention) 4-8, 4-23 AUTO 4-8 BEB 1-12, 1-16, 6-2 BOT and EOT 4-7, 4-23 COMP (compression) 4-8, 4-23, 4-44 DOOR LOCK 3-41, 4-8, 4-20 MANUAL 4-8 SEL (selected) 4-8, 4-23 status indicator 4-8, 4-23 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index -6 M Index LEDs (continued) SYSTEM 4-8 tape position 4-7, 4-23 Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) See LEDs Loaded cartridge is not a cleaning cartridge (message) 6-11 Loading the operating system image 3-39 Load, tape See Tape load M Magazine See Cartridge magazine MANUAL LED 4-8 MEDIACOM 4-42, 4-49 Memory dump 4-56 Message panel 4-8, 4-23 Messages, operator 4-28 MFC See Multifunction controller (MFC) Migrating a tape drive to a Himalaya S-series server 3-12 MODE SEL button 4-9, 4-18 Modular storage system 1-1, 1-8 illustration of 1-9 service clearance 3-8 stack height restrictions 3-10 unpacking 3-16 Module described 1-8, 2-19 dimensions 3-7 illustration 1-4 number 2-19 weights 3-8 Multifunction controller (MFC) BIC diagram completing 2-1 example 2-4 controls one drive CRU 1-10 Multifunction controller (MFC) (continued) definition of 1-10 illustration of 1-10 installing RS-232/SCSI BIC 3-20 number of CRUs supported 3-5 part numbers of 2-2 removing RS-232 BIC 3-19 replacing 6-12, 6-15 RS-232/SCSI BIC attached to 1-10 RS-232/SCSI BIC Diagram completing 2-1 example of 2-4 MULTIFUNCTION_CONTROLLERS paragraph, modifying 2-15 N NO LABEL message 4-29 NOT READY states 4-30 NOUNLOAD option, Backup utility 4-41 NT RDYF message 4-29 NT RDYU message 4-29 O Online dumps, preparing tape drive for 4-43 Operating mode of ACL 4-18 Operating system image, loading 3-39 Operations bringing down 6-12 resuming use of 6-15 Operator buttons 4-9, 4-23 Operator messages 4-28 OSCONFIG file 2-7 OSIMAGE file 2-7 P Pallet, shipping 3-17 Panel, operator control 4-6, 4-22 Part numbers A-1 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index -7 Q Index PATHPROBE command, TMDS 5-2 Performance benefits 1-6 of 5194 over 5190 1-2 Peripheral Utility Program (PUP) See PUP PERIPHERALS paragraph, modifying 2-16 PICs See 6761 fiber-optic plug-in card (F-PIC) See 6762 SCSI plug-in card (S-PIC) PMF CRU configuration forms 2-20 connecting copper SCSI cable to 3-36 description 1-14/1-15 illustration of 1-14 installing 3-3 supports one drive CRU 1-14 used with 5190 or 5194 1-1, 1-13, 1-14 POSITION button 4-9 Power cord See AC power Power requirements 3-9 Power supply 3-9 Power-up sequence ACL 3-41 tape drive 3-41 Processor multifunction (PMF) CRU See PMF CRU Programming considerations 4-53 PUP 4-32 bringing down a tape drive 4-34 bringing up a tape drive 4-33 checking the status of a tape drive 4-32 DOWN command 4-34, 6-3, 6-13 LISTDEV command 4-32/4-34 UP command 3-45, 4-33, 6-15 Q Quick start See Common operations R READY F (RDYF) message 4-29 READY states 4-30 READY U (RDYU) message 4-29 Rear bezel door 3-24 Releases supported 1-2 Removing 3216 BIC 6-14 3216 logic board 6-13 BEB 6-3 cartridge magazine from ACL 4-12 cartridges from magazine 4-16 cleaning cartridge from ACL 6-11 drive CRU 6-5 RS-232 BIC 3-19 tape devices with COUP 2-12 Replacing 3216 controller 6-12 6760 ServerNet/DA 6-15 BEB 6-2 cleaning cartridge in ACL 6-10 drive CRU 6-5, 6-8 MFC 6-12 RESET button 4-9, 4-23 RESTORE utility 3-46, 4-38, 4-40 See also BACKUP utility Returning a drive CRU to Compaq 6-10 Rewinding tape 4-19, 4-26 REWINDNG message 4-29 RS-232/SCSI BIC 1-10 Diagram, completing 2-1 installing 3-20 part number A-2 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index -8 S Index S SAC See ServerNet addressable controller (SAC) SCF ADD command 2-25/2-26 ALTER command 2-26 checking the status of tape devices 4-35 COMPRESSION attribute 4-52 DELETE command 2-27 description 2-25 INFO command 2-26, 2-27 LABELTAPE attribute 4-44 START command 3-46, 4-37 STATUS command 4-35 STOP command 2-27, 4-37, 6-3 testing the tape subsystem 3-47 Scratch tapes 1-5 SCSI cable See also 6762 SCSI plug-in card (SPIC) connecting to drive CRU (Himalaya K-series) 3-30 to drive CRU (Himalaya S-series) 3-32 to MFC BIC 3-34 to PMF CRU or IOMF CRU 3-36 different for K-series and S-series servers 3-30 documenting in PMF CRU configuration forms 2-20 on MFC 1-11 part numbers A-1/A-2 SCSI controller See ServerNet addressable controller (SAC) SCSI extender for fiber-optic cable 1-13, 1-16 SCSI ID See Device ID SCSI passthrough terminator connecting 3-36 internal on some PMF CRUs 1-15 part number of A-2 SCSI port 1-1 connecting a cable to on Himalaya K-series servers 3-30 on Himalaya S-series servers 3-32, 3-36 information on configuration form 2-20 on drive CRU, illustration of 3-23, 3-31, 3-33 on IOMF CRU, illustration of 3-38 on PMF CRU, illustration of 3-37 SCSI SAC on PMF CRU 3-5, 3-14 SEL (selected) LED 4-8, 4-23 SELFTEST CTRL message 3-51, 3-53 Sequential loading of cartridges 4-16 ServerNet addressable controller (SAC) listed in detailed SCF INFO display 2-26 number of CRUs supported 3-5 on 6760 ServerNet/DA configuration form 2-23/2-24 ServerNet/DA See 6760 ServerNet device adapter Service clearance 3-8 Service provider, procedures that require one 6-1 SETMODE operations 4-52, 4-54 Setting compression See Compression, setting device ID 3-41 SHIFT button 4-9, 4-23 Shipping instructions on how to return equipment 6-10 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index -9 T Index Slots cartridge magazine 4-14 CRUs 2-19 number 2-19 Specifications AC power 3-9 dimensions 3-7 environmental 3-9, 4-2 performance 1-6 weights 3-8 S-PIC See 6762 SCSI plug-in card (S-PIC) Stack height 3-10 START button 4-9, 4-23 START command COUP 2-11, 3-45 SCF 3-46, 4-37 STATUS command SCF 3-46, 4-35 TMDS 5-2, 5-5 Status indicator LEDs 4-8, 4-23 STOP command, SCF 2-27, 4-37, 6-3 Subsystem Control Facility (SCF) See SCF Subtype 9 Himalaya K-series servers 2-13, 4-32 Himalaya S-series servers 3-47, 4-36 Supported releases 1-2 SYSTEM LED 4-8 T Tape See Cartridge tapes Tape drive cable and connectors 1-15 Tape drive module See Module Tape dump considerations 2-14 Himalaya K-series servers 4-56/4-57 Himalaya S-series servers 4-57 Tape dump (continued) TSM action 5-7 Tape load considerations 2-15 Himalaya K-series servers 4-57/4-58 Himalaya S-series servers 4-58 Tape mode 4-18 Tape module See Module Tape position LEDs 4-7, 4-23 TAPECOM 4-42 Tape-label formats 1-5 TEST button 4-9, 4-23 TEST command, TMDS 3-45, 5-2 Testing tape drives on Himalaya K-series servers 3-45/3-46 on Himalaya S-series servers 3-46/3-48 Thumbwheel, file-protect 4-3, 4-15 TMDS TAPE subsystem accessing 5-1 commands, summary of 5-2 EXERCISE command 3-45, 5-2 FIRMINFO command 5-2 FLASH command 5-2, 5-4 HELP command 5-3 help subjects 5-3 PATHPROBE command 5-2 starting 5-1 STATUS command 5-2, 5-5 TEST command 3-45, 5-2 UPDATE command 5-2 TMF, using tape drive with 4-41 Transaction Management Facility (TMF) 4-41 Troubleshooting 3-48, 3-52 ACL 3-50/3-53 BEB 3-49, 6-2 BIC 3-49 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index -10 U Index Troubleshooting (continued) logic board 3-48/3-49 PMF CRU 3-52 tape drive 3-51, 3-53 TSM Low-Level Link Application, to perform a memory dump 4-57 TSM package 4-38, 5-1 summary of support 5-7 TSM Service Application brings down the tape drive 6-3 brings up the tape drive 6-4 checks integrity of the subsystem 6-5 testing the tape subsystem using 3-46 Twist-lock handles 3-17 Type 4 Himalaya K-series servers 2-13, 4-32 Himalaya S-series servers 3-47, 4-36 Special Characters * (asterisk) code on cartridge position indicator 4-10 on message panel 3-41 *CLEAN message 4-28, 4-29 -- code, on cartridge position indicator 4-10 U Unit number See also Device ID for Himalaya K-series tape device 2-5 Unlabeled tapes 1-5 UNLOAD button 4-9, 4-23 UNLOADNG message 4-29 Unpacking the modular storage system 3-16 UP command, PUP 3-45, 4-33, 6-15 UPDATE command, TMDS 5-2 Update microcode 5-2 User’s kit 3-16 V Viewing the contents of a tape 4-40 W WARNING!! CHANGE CLEANING CARTRIDGE IN CLEANING CELL message 6-10 Weights, component 3-8 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index- 11 Special Characters Index 5190/5194 Modular Tape Subsystem Manual—426878-002 Index -12